KEYENCE SR-750 User Manual

Download

Page 1

Fixed Mount 2D Code Reader

Important

Point

Reference

300GB

Table of Contents

General Precautions..........................................................................2

Safety Information for SR-750 Series................................................2

SR-750 Series

User's Manual Rev.4.0

Read this manual together with the SR-750 Series Additional Functions Manual.

Read this manual before use. Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

 Symbols

This user's manual uses the following symbols that alert you to important messages. Be sure to read these messages carefully.

It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result

DANGER

in death or serious injury.

It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

WARNING

result in death or serious injury.

It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

CAUTION

result in minor or moderate injury.

It indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in

NOTICE

product damage as well as property damage.

Cautions as to operation that is always performed are shown.

Cautions as to operation that can be easily performed incorrectly are shown.

Matters that will help the user improve understanding of the text and useful information are shown.

The items and pages to be referred to in this document are shown.

Introduction

This instruction manual describes the connection/wiring procedure, setting instructions, and precautions for using the "SR-750 Series 2D Code Reader". Please read this manual thoroughly before using the SR-750 Series to ensure optimum performance. Keep this manual handy for quick future reference.

1-1 Checking the Package Contents ....................................................... 3

1-2 Part Names and Functions ................................................................ 3

1-3 System Configuration and Setup Flow .............................................. 4

2-1 Connecting the Power Source ........................................................... 6

2-2 Connecting the Control Cable and Wiring ......................................... 6

2-3 Connecting the Ethernet Cable ......................................................... 8

3-1 Using the SR-750 Series ................................................................... 9

3-2 Quick Calibration ............................................................................. 10

3-3 Alternate Function ........................................................................... 11

3-4 Test Mode........................................................................................ 12

3-5 Preset/Verification Function.............................................................14

3-6 Multi-I/O Function ............................................................................ 14

3-7 Image Saving Function.................................................................... 16

3-8 Silent Mode...................................................................................... 18

3-9 SR-600 Compatible Output Mode ...................................................19

3-10 Batch Setting Code.......................................................................... 20

3-11 Code quality verification function..................................................... 20

3-12 Duplicate reading prevention interval reset.....................................24

3-13 Edit data function/Edit image file name function..............................24

4-1 Reading Operations......................................................................... 26

4-2 Timing Mode.................................................................................... 26

4-3 Data Transmission Timing ............................................................... 27

4-4 Read Mode ...................................................................................... 28

5-1 Installing, Starting, and Shutting Down............................................30

5-2 Screen Layout .................................................................................33

5-3 AutoID Network Navigator Operation Flow...................................... 34

5-4 Details of Settings View ................................................................... 34

5-5 Sending/Receiving Configuration.................................................... 49

5-6 Saving/Reading a Configuration File...............................................49

5-7 Quick Setup Code ........................................................................... 50

5-8 Terminal........................................................................................... 50

5-9 LiveView .......................................................................................... 51

5-10 ImageView....................................................................................... 52

5-11 FileView ........................................................................................... 53

5-12 Installation Guide ............................................................................. 53

5-13 Export Reader Configuration ........................................................... 54

5-14 Report Generator Function..............................................................55

5-15 Creating Reports for the SR-750 Series.......................................... 56

6-1 Before Mounting the SR-750 Series................................................60

6-2 Mounting the SR-750 Series ........................................................... 60

6-3 Adjusting the Mounting Position ...................................................... 61

6-4 Confirming the Reading Stability ..................................................... 61

7-1 Communication of the SR-750 Series ............................................. 63

7-2 Data Communication Format........................................................... 63

7-3 RS-232C Communication................................................................67

7-4 Ethernet Communication ................................................................. 68

7-5 Socket Communication.................................................................... 69

7-6 FTP Communication ........................................................................ 69

8-1 Details of Command Communication .............................................. 71

8-2 Operation Commands ..................................................................... 71

8-3 Details of Configuration Commands................................................ 75

9-1 PLC Link .......................................................................................... 85

9-2 Configuration ................................................................................... 85

9-3 Device Assignment.......................................................................... 87

9-4 Reference Program ......................................................................... 90

9-5 PLC Link Error ................................................................................. 91

10-1 Master/Slave function ...................................................................... 92

10-2 Setting procedure ............................................................................92

10-3 Multi drop link mode ........................................................................93

10-4 Multi head mode .............................................................................. 93

E SR-750 UM

Page 2

11-1 EtherNet/IP ...................................................................................... 94

WARNING

CAUTION

NOTICE

WARNING

NOTICE

11-2 Cyclic communication...................................................................... 95

11-3 Message Communication..............................................................101

11-4 Reference Program ....................................................................... 105

12-1 PROFINET .................................................................................... 109

12-2 Cyclic communication.................................................................... 109

13-1 Installing MultiMonitor.................................................................... 112

13-2 Using MultiMonitor......................................................................... 113

14-1 Installing FileView.......................................................................... 114

14-2 Using FileView............................................................................... 115

15-1 SR-750 Series Specifications ........................................................ 116

15-2 Dimensions.................................................................................... 117

15-3 SR-750 Series Field of View Size ................................................. 118

15-4 Troubleshooting.............................................................................119

15-5 Checksum Calculation Method...................................................... 121

15-6 ASCII Code List ............................................................................. 121

15-7 Software License ........................................................................... 122

15-8 Precautions on Regulations and Standards..................................122

15-9 Copyright indications ..................................................................... 123

General Precautions

• Do not use this product for the purpose to protect a human body or a part of human body.

• This product is not intended for use as explosion-proof product. Do not use this product in a hazardous location and/or potentially explosive atmosphere.

• Be sure to check that the SR-750 Series performs properly before starting the work or operation.

• If the SR-750 Series malfunctions, take adequate safety precautions to prevent various types of damage.

• Do not use the SR-750 Series in a manner not specified herein. It may result in fire, electric shock or malfunction.

• It should be noted that functions and performances will not be guaranteed if the SR-750 Series is used in any way not specified or described in the product specifications or it is modified.

• When the SR-750 Series is used in combination with other devices, functions and performance may be degraded, depending on the operating conditions and environment.

Safety Information for SR-750 Series

Safety precautions on Laser product

The SR-750 Series Fixed Mount 2D Code Reader uses a visible semiconductor laser, with a wavelength of 660 nm, as a Laser pointer for adjusting the reading position.

 Laser Pointer Specifications

Wavelength 660nm

Output 60μW

Pulse duration 200μs

Laser class

* The classification is based on IEC60825-1 standard following the Laser Notice

No. 50 from FDA (CDRH).

• Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

• Do not disassemble this product. The laser radiation emission from this product is not automatically stopped when it is disassembled.

Precautions on Class 1 Laser Product

• Do not stare into the direct or specularly reflected beam.

Class 1 Laser Product

(IEC60825-1, FDA(CDRH) Part 1040.10*)

Precautions on Proper Use

• Do not use a voltage other than that described in the specifications with the SR-750 Series. Doing so may damage to the unit.

• The SR-750 Series employs 2 power connection methods, which are 24 V DC supply and supply from PoE power supply devices. When connecting the SR-750 Series to the power source, be sure to use one of these methods. Using both power sources simultaneously may cause damage to the units.

• Be sure to turn off the power to devices attached to the SR-750 Series when you plug in or unplug the cables. Failure to do so may cause damage to the SR-750 Series.

• Do not disassemble or modify the SR-750 Series. Doing so may damage to the unit.

• Place cables as far away as possible from high-voltage lines and power lines. Otherwise, electrical noise can be generated that may cause product failure or malfunction.

• The SR-750 Series is a precision instrument. Do not impact or drop the instrument. Pay particular attention when transporting or installing the unit.

• Do not hold the unit by its cable when carrying. The units may become damaged if the cables are disconnected or the units strike each other.

• Do not allow water, oil, dust, or other foreign substances to stick to the scanner. This may cause read errors. Use a soft, dry cloth to wipe any substance from the scanner. (Do not use a cloth dipped in alcohol or other cleaning substance.)

E SR-750 UM

Page 3

1-1 Checking the Package

E SR-750-IM

Fixed Mount 2D Code Reader

SR-750 Series

Instruction manual

Read this instruction manual before using the product in order to achieve maximum performance. Keep this instruction manual in a safe place after reading it so that it can be used at any time.

Symbols

The following symbols alert you to important messages. Be sure to read these messages carefully.

Important

It indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during operation.

Point

It indicates additional information on proper operation.

Reference

It indicates tips for better understanding or useful information.

indicates the reference pages in this manual or the reference pages in separate manuals.

Safety Information for SR-750 Series

General Precautions

Safety precautions on Laser product

The SR-750 Series Fixed Mount 2D Code Reader uses a visible semiconductor laser, with a wavelength of 660 nm, as a Laser pointer for adjusting the reading position.

Laser Pointer Specifications

* The laser classification for FDA(CDRH) is implemented based on

IEC60825-1 in accordance with the requirements of Laser Notice No.50.

Precautions on Proper Use

Precautions on Regulations and Standards

CE Marking

Keyence Corporation has confirmed that this product complies with the essential requirements of the applicable EC Directive, based on the following specifications. Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product in the Member State of European Union.

zEMC Directive (2004/108/EC)

•Applicable standards EMI : EN61326-1, Class A EMS: EN61326-1

Remarks: These specifications do not give any guarantee that the end-product with this product incorporated complies with the essential requirements of EMC Directive. The manufacturer of the end-product is solely responsible for the compliance on the end-product itself according to EMC Directive.

zLow-voltage Directive (2006/95/EC)

•Applicable Standard EN60825-1, Class 1 Laser Product EN62471

CSA Certificate

This product complies with the following CSA and UL standards and has been certified by CSA.

•Applicable standards: CAN/CSA C22.2 No.61010-1 UL61010-1

Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product as a product certified by CSA.

•Overvoltage category

•Use this product under pollution degree 3.

•Use this product at the altitude of 2000 m or less.

•Indoor use only.

•When using this product, use the following power supply.

•CSA or UL certified power supply that provides Class 2 output as defined in the CEC (Canadian Electrical Code) and NFPA79 (NEC: National Electrical Code), or

•CSA or UL certified power supply that has been evaluated as a Limited Power Source as defined in CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60950-1/UL60950-1.

•Either PoE or 24V power supply shall be used.

•The symbol on the product means "Direct current".

FDA (CDRH) Regulations

This product complies with the following FDA (CDRH) regulations.

•FDA(CDRH) Part 1040.10, Class 1 Laser Product The laser classification for FDA(CDRH) is implemented based on IEC608251 in accordance with the requirements of Laser Notice No.50.

FCC Regulations

This product complies with the following FCC EMI regulations.

•FCC Part 15 Subpart B, Class A Digital Device

IC (Industry Canada) Regulations

This product complies with the following IC EMI regulations.

•ICES-003, Class A Digital Apparatus

It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

It indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in product damage as well as property damage.

•Do not use this product for the purpose to protect a human body or a part

of human body.

•This product is not intended for use as explosion-proof product. Do not

use this product in a hazardous location and/or potentially explosive atmosphere.

•Be sure to check that the SR-750 Series performs properly before starting

the work or operation.

•If the SR-750 Series malfunctions, take adequate safety precautions to

prevent various types of damage.

•Do not use the SR-750 Series in a manner not specified herein. It may

result in fire, electric shock or malfunction.

•It should be noted that functions and performances will not be guaranteed

if the SR-750 Series is used in any way not specified or described in the product specifications or it is modified.

•When the SR-750 Series is used in combination with other devices,

functions and performance may be degraded, depending on the operating conditions and environment.

Wavelength 660nm

Output 60PW

Pulse duration 200Ps

Laser class

Class 1 Laser Product

(IEC60825-1:2007, FDA(CDRH) Part 1040.10*)

•Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than

those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

•Do not disassemble this product. The laser radiation emission from this

product is not automatically stopped when it is disassembled.

Precautions on Class 1 Laser Product

•Do not stare into the direct or specularly reflected beam.

96M12458

DANGER

WARNING

CAUTION

NOTICE

WARNING

CAUTION

NOTICE

WARNING

•Do not use a voltage other than that described in the specifications with

the SR-750 Series. Doing so may damage to the unit.

•The SR-750 Series employs 2 power connection methods, which are 24 V

DC supply and supply from PoE power supply devices. When connecting the SR-750 Series to the power source, be sure to use only one of these methods. Using both power sources simultaneously may cause damage to the units.

•Be sure to turn off the power to devices attached to the SR-750 Series

when you plug in or unplug the cables. Failure to do so may cause damage to the SR-750 Series.

•Do not disassemble or modify the SR-750 Series. Doing so may damage to

the unit.

•Place cables as far away as possible from high-voltage lines and power

lines. Otherwise, electrical noise can be generated that may cause product failure or malfunction.

•The SR-750 Series is a precision instrument. Do not impact or drop the

instrument. Pay particular attention when transporting or installing the unit.

•Do not hold the unit by its cable when carrying. The units may become

damaged if the cables are disconnected or the units strike each other.

•Do not allow water, oil, dust, or other foreign substances to stick to the

scanner. This may cause read errors. Use a soft, dry cloth to wipe any substance from the scanner. (Do not use a cloth dipped in alcohol or other cleaning substance.)

NOTICE

TEST

TUNE

POW

ERR

NET

STB

OK/NG/

(4) TEST button

(5) TUNE button

(6) POW LED

(7) OK/NG/ERR LED

(8) NET LED

(9) IN LED

(10) Multiple LED indicator

(1) Scanner

(2) Power supply and

control port

(3) Ethernet port

Contents

The packages of the SR-750 Series main units and the SR-750 Series configuration software contain the following components. Check that you have all the package contents before use.

 SR-750 Series (Fixed mount 2D code reader)

Main unit SR-750/751/750HA SR-752

Mounting screw (M4) x 4 Port cover (Power supply and control port,

Ethernet connection port) x 1 each

Mounting bracket x 1

NFPA79 compliant Ethernet cable

• OP-87359 (2 m cable)

• OP-87360 (5 m cable)

• OP-87361 (10 m cable)

Ethernet assembly plug

• OP-87362

 Long distance lens

400 mm lens

• SR-75L4

600 mm lens

• SR-75L6

1-2 Part Names and Functions

Insulating spacer x 2

Washer x 2 Instruction Manual

 SR-H3W

AutoID Network Navigator

 Cable and connector

Control cable (Power supply, I/O, RS-232C)

• OP-87224 (2 m cable)

• OP-87225 (5 m cable)

• OP-87226 (10 m cable)

NFPA79 compliant Control cable

• OP-87353 (2 m cable)

• OP-87354 (5 m cable)

• OP-87355 (10 m cable)

Control cable (NFPA79-compliant) with D-Sub9 pin (Power supply, I/O, RS-232C)

• OP-87527 (2 m cable)

• OP-87528 (5 m cable)

• OP-87529 (10 m cable)

This section describes the part names and functions of the SR-750 Series.

Number Name Function

(1) Scanner Reads 2D codes and bar codes.

Power supply and

(2)

control port

(3) Ethernet port Connect the Ethernet cable.

(4) TEST button

(5) TUNE button

(6) POW LED When the power is turned ON, the "green" light turns on.

(7) OK/NG/ERR LED

(8) NET LED

(9) IN LED When an input terminal is on, this lights up.

(10)

Multiple LED

indicator

Connect the control cable.

Use this button to perform the following operations:

• Run 1 reading operation.

• Start and stop test mode.

• Run the multi-reading mode.

• Fix the communication settings of RS-232C to the default values.

• Reset PLC link error.

Use this button to perform the following operations:

• Turn on the laser pointer for reading position adjustment.

• Start parameter tuning.

• Display the number of parameter banks of which the alternate function is effective.

• Read the quick setup code.

• Reset errors.

• Start Ethernet communication BootP mode connection.

• When OK output is ON, the "green" light turns on.

• When NG output is ON, the "orange" light turns on.

• When ERR output is ON, the "red" light turns on.

• When connected to Ethernet, the "green" light turns on.

• When the Ethernet data is sent/received, the "green" light turns on.

This displays the operation status including the bank number upon successful reading, reading stability and operation mode.

300GB

E SR-750 UM

Page 4

Operation status on the multiple LED indicator

Numeric value

SR-750 Series Setup PC

Ethernet

AutoID Network Navigator

Host

PLC

Ethernet

EtherNet/IP

RS-232C

I/O terminal

PROFINET

 Run mode

In Run mode, the multiple LED displays a number, letter, or other symbol.

Multiple LED

indicator

Display content

0 to 10 When reading

P Preset Preset successful

2 points

light up

2 points flashing

L TUNE button lock

NG Saving the read

←→

Error code

All LEDs

light up

Operation Meaning

successful

Laser pointer emission

Set the communication parameters of the RS-232C to the default state.

Temporary IP address setting mode

error image

Error occurred. This shows that an error, such as buffer

At power-on All LEDs light up for 500 ms when the

The parameter bank number is displayed (1 to 10). When the parameter bank is 10, the first digit value and "1" are displayed alternately.

"3-3 Alternate Function (Page 11)"

"3-5 Preset/Verification Function

(Page 14)"

The laser pointer is turned on when the

button is pressed quickly.

Press and hold the button for at least 6 seconds. The LED flashes and the RS232C communication condition returns to the factory default state.

Press the TUNE button for at least 5 seconds. The LED flashes in the temporary IP address setting mode.

The button is locked according to the settings. The laser pointer cannot be turned on and quick calibration cannot be performed.

The LED lights up while the read error image is being written into the ROM.

"3-7 Image Saving Function (Page 16)"

over or IP address duplication has occurred. E and error code (number) lights up alternately.

power is turned on.

 Other operations

In the quick calibration operation, the multiple LED displays bars, a number, or a letter.

Action

Quick calibration

Multiple LED

indicator

Display content Meaning

Bar LEDs light up

in series.

Bar LEDs and upper 2 points

light up.

This shows the progress of the quick calibration.

The quick calibration is complete and the test mode is running. Changing the position of the code fluctuates the bar LEDs.

Quick calibration failed (Data for successful quick calibration was

not provided.)

Quick calibration failed (Data for successful quick calibration was

provided.)

Saving complete

Error indications on the multiple LED indicator

Display content

E0, E1

Main unit system error * Abnormal operation of the main unit. Contact your nearest KEYENCE office.

Configuration file reading error, image save error

* If the operation is not restored even after the main unit is initialized, there may

be problems with the main unit . Contact your nearest KEYENCE office.

E3 PROFINET error

E4 Transmission buffer overflow

E5 IP address duplication error

E6 Main unit system firmware update error

E7 PLC link error

E8 Script error

Description

 Quick setup code reading mode

In Quick setup code reading mode, the multiple LED displays a number, alphabet, etc.

Multiple LED

indicator

←→

Display content

Meaning

C: Starts reading the quick setup code. Numeric value: The number "C" of quick setup codes being read and the numeric value are displayed alternately.

Reading successful or program successful

Reading failed or program failed

 Test Mode

In Test mode, the multiple LED displays measurement results.

Multiple LED

status

5 bars lit

4 bars lit

3 bars lit

Reading rate

measurement

(%)

90 to 100 Up to 99 LEVEL 5 Green

70 to 80 100 to 199 LEVEL 4 Green

50 to 60 200 to 299 LEVEL 3 Green

Processing time

(ms)

Position

OK/NG/ERR

1-3 System Configuration and

Setup Flow

System configuration

The SR-750 Series has the following configuration.

LED

2 bars lit

1 bar lit

0 bars lit

E SR-750 UM

30 to 40 300 to 399 LEVEL 2 Green

10 to 20 400 or more LEVEL 1 Green

Reading error Red

Page 5

Setup Flow

After unpacking the package, first check the package contents.

Start operation.

Connect the SR-750 Series to a communication unit or a PC.

Use the AutoID Network Navigator to configure and send settings to the SR-750 Series.

Install the SR-750 Series according to the location.

Adjust the reading conditions and make the operation settings of the SR750 Series.

This section describes the flow of the setup procedure required for starting the operation of the SR-750 Series.

E SR-750 UM

Page 6

2-1 Connecting the Power

NOTICE

+24 V

24 V DC ±10%

Brown

0 V Blue

SR-750 Series HUB compatible with PoE power supply

Ethernet cable for the SR-750 Series

NOTICE

Align the notch with the marking position.

2-2 Connecting the Control

Source

This section describes how to connect the SR-750 Series and the power source.

Power supply to the SR-750 Series

There are 2 methods employed for connecting power source to the SR-750 Series.

• Connect the power supply wire of the control cable to a 24 V DC power supply device.

• Connect to a PoE (Power over Ethernet) power supply device using the Ethernet port.

Use only one of the above methods to connect to the power source according to the usage.

Make sure to use either one of the connection methods for power supply.

NOTICE

If power is supplied both from the control cable and PoE power supply device at the same time, the unit may be damaged.

Wiring when supplying 24 V to the control cable

• Use a steady power supply voltage of 24 V DC ±10%.

• Do not use a power supply other than 24 V DC. Otherwise, it may cause failure.

• Before connecting or disconnecting cables, make sure to turn off power to the equipment connected to the SR-750 Series. Otherwise, it may cause the failure of the SR-750 Series.

Connection when supplying power from a PoE device

Use the Ethernet cable for the SR-750 Series for connection. Connect the RJ-45 connector of the Ethernet cable to a device (switching hub, etc.) compatible with the PoE power supply feature.

Cable and Wiring

Connect the control cable to the SR-750 Series.

Control cable connection method

1 Align the dent of the cable connector with the marking position next

to the control port.

POWER

2 Tighten the connector screw by turning clockwise. Set the screw

tightening torque to 1.5 - 2.0 N•m.

When connecting the connector, insert it not to lean toward one side and securely tighten it. Under-tightening can lead to loose connector due to vibrations, resulting in poor contact. Insufficient tightening may not meet the requirements of the protective structure. * To get a rough idea, after tightening it by hand, retighten it

approximately 90° - 120° using a tool such as pliers. Do not repeatedly bend the root of the connector of control cable. Loose connection may result.

Control cable color and the meaning of signal

Be sure to connect with a PoE power supply device compliant

NOTICE

with IEEE802.3af.

The following different color lead wires are drawn out of the control cable. Solder the lead wire to the connector using the wire attached to the device to be connected.

Wire color Symbol Description

Brown 24 V

Blue 0 V

Orange RXD

Yellow TXD RS-232C Send Output 28

Purple SGND RS-232C GND – 28

Green IN1 IN1 Input Input 26

Gray IN2 IN2 Input Input 28

White and blue INCOM

Pink OUT1 OUT1 Output Output 28

Aqua blue OUT2 OUT2 Output Output 28

White OUT3 OUT3 Output Output 28

Black OUTCOM

Black tube FG FG – –

Make sure to turn the power off when attaching or removing the control cable.

+24 V power supply

Power supply GND

RS-232C Receive

Input common mode voltage

Output common mode voltage

Signal

direction

Input 26

–26

Input 28

–28

AWG si ze

E SR-750 UM

Page 7

 Control cable (NFPA79-compliant) with D-Sub9 pin

D-sub9 pin (Female) DTE specifications (Terminal definition) M2.6 screw

54321

9876

Pin No. Symbol Description Signal direction

2 TXD Data Send Output

3 RXD Data Receive Input

5 SGND Signal GND -

Wire color Symbol Description

Green IN1 IN1 Input

Gray IN2 IN2 Input

White and blue INCOM Input common

Pink OUT1 OUT1 Output

Aqua blue OUT2 OUT2 Output

White OUT3 OUT3 Output

Black OUTCOM Output common

1 mm

10 mm

Wire color Symbol Description

Brown 24 V +24 V Power supply

Blue 0 V Power supply GND

Black tube FG FG

6.6 mm

11 m m

4.3 mm

FG Black tube

10kΩ

5.6kΩ

Photocoupler isolation

Contact

non-contact

Internal circuit

IN1 (Green) IN2 (Gray)

INCOM (White and blue)

IN1

(Green)

INCOM (White and blue)

Brown (red)

Black (white)

Blue (black)

Photoelectric Sensor (NPN)

0002

0001

0000

PLC

OUT COM (Black)

OUT 1 (Pink)

OUT 2 (Aqua blue)

OUT 3 (White)

z RS-232C wire

The tip of the RS-232C wire is a D-sub9-pin.

IN1/IN2 wire connection

• The IN1 (timing) input means the input that causes the SR-750 Series to start reading.

• The IN2 (preset) input means the input that causes the SR-750 Series to register preset data.

IN1/IN2 inputs operate by voltage inputs.

z Control wire (Input/Output signal wire)

The tip of the control wire is a rod terminal.

z Power wire

The tip of the power wire is a Y-shape terminal.

• Input rating : 15 - 26.4 V DC

• Repetitive peak off-state current : 0.2 mA

 Connecting a photoelectric sensor manufactured by

KEYENCE

Connection example when the IN1 terminal is used as the trigger input terminal.

Connecting the OUT1/OUT2/OUT3 wires

• The OUT1 (OK) output is used as an output for successful reading and verification of OK as a result of checking against the preset data.

• The OUT2 (NG/ERROR) output is used as an output for reading failure and verification of NG reading as a result of checking against the preset data.

• OUT3 (BUSY) is output any time the trigger input cannot be accepted. For example, a busy signal will be output at initial start-up, during the key operation, reading operation, etc.

The output form of each signal is photo MOS relay.

Internal circuit

OUT 1(Pink), OUT2 (Aqua blue), OUT3 (White)

OUT COM (Black)

Load

Connecting the FG wire

Be sure to provide Class D ground for the FG wire.

The shield and FG wire of the control cable and the shield of the Ethernet cable are electrically connected via the main unit case.

NOTICE

Provide them with a common ground.

• Maximum rated load : 30 V DC (1 output maximum 50 mA, 3 outputs

total 100 mA or less)

• Leakage current when OFF : 0.1 mA or less

• Residual voltage when ON : 1 V or less

 Connection with KEYENCE PLC (Programmable

controller)

E SR-750 UM

Page 8

Wiring the RS-232C signal line

PC SR-750 Series

D-Sub 9 pin

(female)

#4-40 screw

Yel lo w Orange Purple

3 5

TxD

SGND

RxD

4SG

Handheld programmer SR-750 Series

Modular

Connector

Yel l ow

Orange

Purple

8 4

TxD

SGND

RxD

KV-L20V/L20R (Port 1)

KV-N10L

SR-750 Series

D-Sub 9 pin

(female)

#4-40 screw

Yel lo w

Orange

Purple

KV-L20V/L20R (Port 2) SR-750 Series

Yellow

Orange

Purple

2 3

8 4

TxD

SGND

RxD

QJ71C24N/-R2 SR-750 Series

D-Sub 9 pin

(male)

M2.6 screw

Yellow

Orange

Purple

TxD

SGND

RxD

2 3 4 5 9

PLC SR-750 S eries

D-Sub 9 pin

(male)

M2.6 screw

Yellow

Orange

Purple

N-R4 SR-750 Series

Round connector

12-pin (male)

Yel l ow

Orange

Purple

NOTICE

protrusion

positioning pin

connector screw

View from the connector side

protrusion

positioning pin

Rotate the connector screw so that the protrusion and the positioning pin come to the above position.

Approx. 4 mm of clearance remains when inserted fully.

Approx. 4 mm

white mark

protrusion

POWER

ETHERNET

Connect to host devices (PC, PLC, etc.) as illustrated below:

 Connection to a PC

RxD

TxD

GND(SG)

RTS CTS

DTR(ER)

DSR(DR)

3 5 7 8 4 6

TxD RxD SGND

 Connection to the handheld programmer for the

KEYENCE KV Series

 Connection to the KV-L21V/L20V/L20R/N10L

2-3 Connecting the Ethernet

Cable

Connect the Ethernet cable to the SR-750 Series in the following procedure.

1 Preparation of Ethernet cable

First, rotate the connector screw and align the protrusion position with the positioning pin position in the connector.

2 Connect to the SR-750 main unit

Align the protrusion position of the connector screw with the white mark position of the SR-750 Series Ethernet port. Then, insert straight to avoid tilting the connector.

 Connection to the QJ71C24N/-R2

 Connection to the SYSMAC Series PLC

CJ1W-SCU(-V1) CS1W-SCU-V1 CS1W-SCB-V1 CP1W-CIF01

TxD

RxD

SGND

POWER

ETHERNET

3 Tighten the connector

Rotate the connector screw in the arrow direction until it stops (approx. 180 degrees) and tighten it.

• When connecting the connector, insert it straight so it does not tilt. Otherwise, the connector pin may be damaged.

• Tighten the connector screw correctly. If it is not tightened properly, the connector may become loose due to vibration, etc. and connection failure may occur.

• Do not repeatedly bend the root of the connector of Ethernet cable. Loose connection may result.

 Wiring with the N-R4 Series

GND

E SR-750 UM

3 4 7 8

TxD

RxD

SGND

Page 9

3-1 Using the SR-750 Series

Preparations

Start of

Operation

TUNE Button Operation Procedure

This section describes basic uses for performing reading operation using the SR750 Series.

Basic steps

Before using the SR-750 Series, register codes and conduct read test by performing the following steps:

(1) Read condition setting

Perform the quick calibration on the SR-750 Series.

• 3-2 Quick Calibration

• 5-4 Details of Settings View

(2) Read test

Once the quick tuning is complete, confirm that reading is stable. Using the test mode of the SR-750 Series, confirm the reading stability and the read processing time.

• 3-1 Using the SR-750 Series (TEST Button Operation).

• 3-4 Test Mode

• 5-8 Terminal

(3) Determination of operation

Let's consider the usage of the SR-750 Series. The SR-750 Series has functions that lead to stable operation or reduction in control man-hours.

 Function leading to stable read

• 3-3 Alternate Function

• SR-750 Series Operations

 Function leading to reduction in control man-hours

• 3-5 Preset/Verification Function

• 3-6 Multi-I/O Function

• 3-8 Silent Mode

• Edit data function and edit image file name function

• Duplicate reading prevention interval reset

• Master/Slave function

 Connection method with a control device

• Connection and Wiring

• SR-750 Series Communication Specifications

(4) Start of Operation

Once the operation procedure and installation conditions have been determined, you can start the operation. The SR-750 Series has the functions that are useful for analyzing read errors, etc. that occur during operation.

• Matching function

• 3-11 Code quality verification function

• 3-7 Image Saving Function

• 7-2 Data Communication Format

• 7-6 FTP Communication

Multiple

Operation

Press once quickly (less than 1 s)

Press for 2 seconds

Press for 3 seconds

Press for 4 seconds

Press for 5 seconds

indicator

LED

Lighting Action

The laser pointer emits a laser beam. (Reading is disabled while the laser pointer is

on.)

Illuminates

Activates the quick calibration function.

1 time

2 times

3 times

"3-2 Quick Calibration (Page 10)"

The number of parameter banks (0 to 10) for which the alternate function can be used is shown on the multiple LED indicator. When the number of registered parameter banks is 10, "0" and "1" are displayed alternately.

"3-3 Alternate Function (Page 11)"

Activates the batch setting reading mode.

"3-10 Batch Setting Code (Page 20)"

Activates the temporary IP address setting mode. * Only in this mode, the operation does not

finish even if the TUNE button is briefly pressed once. Assign the temporary IP address or turn the power on again.

* To quit an action/mode, press the button once briefly.

To quit the quick calibration, hold down the button for at least 2 seconds.

TEST Button Operation Procedure

Multiple

Operation

Press once quickly (less than 1 s)

Press for 2 seconds

Press for 3 seconds

Press for 4 seconds

Press for 5 seconds

Press for 6 seconds

indicator

LED

Lighting Action

Illuminates

One reading operation is performed.

Activates the reading rate test mode.

1 time

2 times

3 times

4 times

5 times

"Reading rate test mode" (Page 12)

Activates the tact measurement test mode.

"Read time test mode (Page 13)"

Activates the bar code position test mode.

"Code position measurement test mode"

(Page 13)

Runs the multi 1 read mode.

"4-4 Read Mode (Page 28)"

Sets the communication settings of RS-232C to the default state temporarily.

SR-750 Main Unit Buttons

The SR-750 Series main unit has 2 buttons for registering and adjusting the reading operation.

• TUNE button : used for turning on the laser-aimer, starting quick calibration and

• TEST button : used for starting the test mode and changing the RS-232C

According to the operating status of each button, the status is also displayed on the multiple LED.

This section describes the operation procedure of the 2 buttons.

reading the quick setup code

communication settings to the default condition.

* To quit an operation, press the button once briefly. * The default state of the RS-232C communication settings is as follows.

• The default settings for the RS-232C communication Baud rate : 115200 bps Header : None Data bits : 8 bit Terminator : CR Parity : Even Stop bit length : 1 bit

Operation of I/O terminals

The default settings of the I/O terminals of the SR-750 Series are as follows:

Terminal Function

Input terminal IN1 Trigger input

Output terminal OUT1 OK

IN2 Preset input

OUT2 NG/ERROR

OUT3 TRG BUSY

LOCK BUSY MODE BUSY ERR BUSY

* Functions of each terminal can be changed according to the settings.

"3-6 Multi-I/O Function (Page 14)"

E SR-750 UM

Page 10

3-2 Quick Calibration

TEST TUNE

SR-625

POWERR

NET IN

STB

OK/NG/

Focal distance : SR-750H A : 38 mm

SR-750 : 60 mm SR-751 : 100 mm SR-752 : 250 mm

Illuminating LEDs increase upward.

Reading rate

Test result display

Illuminates

Flash alternately Flash alternately

Parameter bank No.

Indicates whether the initial settings have been changed or not. Green: Not changed. Red: Changed

Illuminates in green

Illuminates in red

This section describes the Quick Calibration function.

Quick Calibration

The SR-750 Series automatically adjusts parameters for reading the target codes through the main unit button operation or AutoID Network Navigator and store the settings in its internal memory. This function is called "Quick Calibration". Set the calibration condition by using AutoID Network Navigator or sending the setting commands.

 Setting items of calibration conditions

• Camera settings Set the brightness adjustment mode, exposure on high speed mode, offset and dynamic range.

• Tuning options Set the tuning method, multi read and inverse read.

Quick Calibration Function Operation

The following are the quick calibration methods.

• Using the main unit buttons

• Using the input terminal

• Using AutoID Network Navigator

Each operation method is described.

Activation using the button on the panel

Use the button on the panel of the SR-750 Series to activate the quick calibration. When the button is held down for 2 seconds in Quick Calibration mode, the quick calibration is canceled and the SR-750 Series returns to Run mode.

1 Set up the SR-750 Series and prepare the code that is going to be

read.

2 Press the button quickly to start the laser pointer emission and

adjust the reading position.

After the adjustment, press the button quickly to turn off the laser pointer. * When SR-75L4 or SR-75L6 is attached, the emission of the laser pointer is

not visible.

4 After the calibration, the reading rate measurement is performed

automatically.

Once the calibration finishes successfully, the SR-750 Series starts the reading rate measurement. Check the level of reading stability on the multiple LED indicator.

If the reading failure continues for a certain period of time, the quick calibration is performed again.

If the calibration fails, "F" or "H" is displayed By pressing the button, you can perform the quick calibration again.

• F: Displayed when the quick calibration failed.

• H: Displayed when the quick calibration was completed successfully but the reading failed and another quick calibration was attempted but failed. By pressing the button, you can register the result of the successful calibration.

5 Press the button and select the parameter bank in which to

Every time the button is pressed, the parameter bank number changes by one. When the initial settings have been changed for the parameter bank being displayed, the OK/NG/ERROR LED illuminates in red. When the parameter bank number is 10, "0" and "1" are displayed alternately.

6 When the parameter bank in which to register the parameters is

determined, press the button to register the parameters.

When the parameters are registered successfully, the multiple LED indicator shows "d".

Activation using the input terminal

By assigning "Quick Calibration Operation" to an input terminal, you can use that terminal to activate the quick calibration.

1 Turn on the input terminal to which the function has been assigned.

The quick calibration starts.

2 "1" is displayed.

Parameter bank 1 is overwritten with the calibration result and the TUNING OK output turns on. When the calibration fails, the OK/NG/ERROR LED illuminates in red, the ERROR signal is output, and the calibration operation ends.

3 Press and hold the button for two seconds to perform quick

calibration.

During the quick calibration, the multiple LED indicator illuminates as shown on the right.

E SR-750 UM

Point

When the input terminal is used to activate the quick calibration, the calibration result is automatically written to parameter bank No. 1.

3 Turn off the input terminal.

Page 11

Activation using AutoID Network Navigator

Lights up in green or blue

Brightness adjustment bar

YES

Reading success

Start reading

Scanning

Decoding

Read error

Select parameter bank

Was re ading

successful?

Level trigger

turned off?

or One-shot timeout?

Decode timeout

period remains?

Retry possible?

Quick calibration is performed using AutoID Network Navigator. Confirming the actual scanned image, you can operate calibration.

1 Connects the SR-750 Series to the AutoID Network Navigator

The following screen will appear when the SR-750 Series is detected. Confirm that the indicator displayed on the left of the reader name lights up in green or blue.

2 Click the [Pointer] button.

The laser pointer of the SR-750 Series lights up. Adjust the center of the code to the position where the laser pointer emitted.

3 Click the [Monitor] button.

Looking at real-time scanned images, you can confirm the code positions. Adjust the brightness using the "Brightness adjustment bar" on the right. After the code position is determined, press the "Monitor" button to finish the setting.

3-3 Alternate Function

This section describes the alternate function.

Alternate Function

The SR-750 Series can perform the reading operation while switching between multiple parameter banks that are registered for the code being read. The function that performs reading operation with the most appropriate parameter while automatically switching the parameter bank - this is called "Alternate Function". Even when there are fluctuations in printing conditions or reading distance, since it operates by switching between multiple parameter banks during a single read operation, a stable read operation is provided. By default, read operation is performed using the parameter bank 0 (bank for read quick setup code).

Parameter banks

The SR-750 Series sets parameters necessary for code recognition such as scan conditions and filter conditions. Location where this setting is stored is called a "Parameter Bank". The SR-750 Series has 10 parameter banks. Multiple optimal parameters can be registered according to work conditions and printing conditions.

The following settings are stored in the parameter bank.

• Code type............................Set the version of the code to be read, the number of

codes, and the output length limitation function.

• Internal light/External light... Set whether or not to use internal lighting and external lighting.

• Scan conditions................... Set exposure time, gain, and dynamic range.

• Filter .................................... Set the filter condition to be used.

• Others ................................. Set the alternate, decoding area, algorithm, etc.

4 Click [Calibration] button.

The most appropriate scan condition is automatically set according to the code. Settings are registered with bank, and the operation finishes.

5 Perform the reading test.

Perform the reading rate test and processing time test, and confirm the reading stability of the calibration result.

• Reading rate test display screen • Processing time test display screen

Alternate Function Operations

The following flow chart illustrates operations that occur during the alternate function:

* Reading starts from the bank set as the "Alternate start bank".

Important

Since the alternate function cycles through the parameter banks one at a to determine the optimal settings, overall processing time may increase. (The processing time depends on the decode timeout period setting.) The alternate function is turned off by default. The function is enabled automatically after the Tuning operation has been performed on any of the parameter banks. The alternate function is disabled in the following cases:

• When using the read mode in the burst mode

• When the alternate function is turned off for all parameter banks

• When the bank specify trigger input command (LON01 to 10) is sent to directly specify the parameter bank for reading.

E SR-750 UM

Page 12

 Bank prioritizing function

Point

Reference

Reading

order

Parameter bank

No.

Reading

order

Parameter bank

No.

Reading Success

Activate the test. Stop the test.

Tes t in g

Test operations

Tes tin g

Test commands

Timing operation

Testing

Tes t i ng

Activate the test. Stop the test.

Timin g ON Timing OFF

When the alternate setting order is set to "Begin with successful bank", the next reading starts from the parameter bank of the most recent successful reading. When codes with similar conditions are read in sequence, prioritizing according to the last successful bank may result in a shorter reading processing time.

Operation of the bank prioritizing function when parameter banks 1 to 4 are used

The reading order is changed to start reading from the parameter bank of the previous successful reading.

The bank prioritizing function is effective only in Operation mode. The reading order is reset to the default setting when one of the following operations is performed:

• Stopping the power supply

• Entering the test mode

• Entering Setting mode or Test mode

• Changing the alternate setting

 Online mode

Online mode is useful for troubleshooting issues during run-time operation. Online test mode can only be enabled through serial command input.

"8-2 Operation Commands (Page 71)" To begin the test, turn the timing input on. To end the test and output results, turn the timing input off.

Test Mode Measurement Status

The measurement status of the test mode can be checked on the multiple LED indicator. The multiple LED displays the following symbols during test mode.

Multiple LED status

5 bars lit

4 bars lit

Reading rate

(%)

90 to 100 Up to 99 LEVEL5 Green

70 to 80 100 to 199 LEVEL4 Green

Processing

time (ms)

Code position measurement

OK/NG/

ERROR LED

3-4 Test Mode

This section describes the test mode of the SR-750 Series.

SR-750 Series Test Mode

Function Description

Reading rate test mode Offline Scans codes 10 times and measures the

Offline This test mode checks the number of

Read time test mode Offline This test mode measures the amount of

Offline This test mode measures the amount of time

Code position measurement test mode

Offline In this test mode, the level that indicates how

For more information about the TEST button operations of the SR-750 Series or the multiple LED status display, refer to "3-1 Using the SR-750 Series (Page

9)".

•

It is also possible to perform the test mode by specifying a parameter bank.

"8-2 Operation Commands (Page 71)"

• If no parameter banks have setting values, the test mode is performed for the parameter bank 0 (bank for read quick setup code).

reading rate according to the number of times that the code was read correctly.

successful decodes against the number of decodes attempted while the trigger input is turned ON.

decode time that it takes to read a code and outputs the result every 10 decodings are performed.

that it takes to read a code and outputs the result when the trigger input turns OFF.

far the code shifts from the center of the field of view is measured.

3 bars lit

50 to 60 200 to 299 LEVEL3 Green

2 bars lit

30 to 40 300 to 399 LEVEL2 Green

1 bar lit

10 to 20 400 or more LEVEL1 Green

0 bars lit

Reading error Red

Test Mode Details

This section describes the advanced details of each test mode.

Reading rate test mode

This test mode scans codes and measures the number of successful reads. The offline mode scans 10 times and outputs the number of successful reads. The offline test mode outputs the reading rate which is obtained from the number of decodes against the number of decodes attempted while the trigger input is ON.

The parameter bank switches while scanning, just as when reading with the alternate function. When reading is successful, the parameter bank used for reading is fixed and the reading rate is calculated. When a read error occurs, the test mode switches to another parameter bank and continues the measurement.

Online and offline modes

 Offline mode

Offline mode is useful for fine-tuning the installation position, distance or angle during initial setup. Data is continuously output as long as the test is active. The test result data is output in real time.

E SR-750 UM

Page 13

 Starting reading rate test mode

Reference

a = Pa rameter bank numbers

(01 to 10)

b = Rea ding rate

(1 to 100)

d = Average b rightness value in co de

region (0 to 255)

a = Pa rameter bank numbers

(01 to 10)

b = Rea ding rate

(1 to 100)

c = Number of decoding successes/

Number of decoding operations

d = Average b rightness value in co de

region (0 to 255)

a = Parameter bank No.

(00 to 10) b = Lat est reading time c = Maximum read time

(Maximum value of the read

operation from starting the read

time test mode to outputting data) d = Mi nimum read time

(Maximum value of the read

operation from starting the read

time test mode to outputting data) * The values for b, c, and d will be

zero suppressed.

a = Parameter bank No.

(00 to 10) b = Po sition level (0 to 5)

The following procedures can be used to start and stop the reading rate test mode:

• Start: Hold the button for 2 seconds. Stop: Tap the button once briefly.

• Start: Send the TEST1 (#TEST1) command from the control host. Stop: Send the QUIT command (#QUIT) from the control host.

• Using AutoID Network Navigator or direct serial commands, assign "TEST" and "Reading rate test mode" to one of the IN terminals. Start: Turn the input on Stop: Turn the input off

 Reading rate test mode output data

Offline mode

The offline mode outputs data in the following format every 10 reading operations.

Read data

Online mode

The online mode outputs data in the following format when the trigger input is turned off.

Read data

:a:b%:d

:a:b%:c:d

 Read time test mode output data

Offline mode

The offline mode outputs data in the following format every 10 successful decodings or every time the decoding fails.

Online mode

The online mode outputs data in the following format when the trigger input is turned off.

(The format is the same for offline and online modes.)

Read data

Reference

: a : now = b ms : max = c ms : min = d ms

• When starting test mode, the data addition function is inactive.

• When TEST2nn (#TEST2nn) (nn: Parameter bank No.) is sent, the read time test mode is run for the bank with the specified parameter bank number.

• When the TEST2nn (#TEST2nn) command is sent or when there is only 1 parameter bank for reading, the specified decode timeout period is ignored and read operation is performed with a decode timeout period of 2550 ms. If it has been determined that the image cannot be decoded, measurement of the image is stopped without waiting for the decode timeout period expiration.

Code position measurement test mode

• When starting test mode, the data addition function is inactive.

• When TEST1nn (#TEST1nn) (nn: Parameter bank No.) is sent, the reading rate test mode is run for the bank with the specified parameter bank number.

Read time test mode

This test mode measures the amount of time that it takes to read a code and outputs the result. The parameter bank switches while scanning, just as when reading with the alternate function. If reading is successful, the amount of time required from the start of reading until the completion of reading is measured and output. If the decoding fails, the read time becomes 0 ms.

 Starting read time test mode

The following procedures can be used to start and stop read time test mode:

• Start: Hold the button for 3 seconds. Stop: Tap the button once briefly to finish.

• Start: Send the TEST2 (#TEST2) command from the control host. Stop: Send the QUIT command (#QUIT) from the control host to finish.

• Assign "TEST" and "Reading rate test" to one of the IN terminals. Start: Turn on the input Stop: Turn off the input

This test mode measures how far the code shifts from the center of the field of view. This test mode can be used to perceive the amount of displacement and adjust both the code position and the SR-750 Series installation location.

Ideal position (LEVEL5) Shifted position (LEVEL1)

The center of the code should coincide with the center of the field of view.

The code is displaced from the center of the field of view.

 Starting code position measurement test mode

The following procedures can be used to start and stop code position measurement mode:

• Start: Hold the button for 4 seconds. Stop: Tap once briefly to finish.

• Start: Send the TEST3 command from the control host. Stop: Send the QUIT command from the control host.

• Assign "TEST" and "Positioning Test" to one of the IN terminals. Start: Turn the input on Stop: Turn the input off

 Code position measurement test mode output data

During code position measurement test mode, data of the average of 10 scans (the fractional portion is dropped) is sent to the computer in the following format after scanning 10 times:

Read data

:a: level = b

• When starting test mode, the data addition function is inactive.

Reference

• The code position measurement test mode does not run in online mode.

• When TEST3nn (nn: Parameter bank No.) is sent, the code position test mode is run for the bank with the specified parameter bank number.

E SR-750 UM

Page 14

3-5 Preset/Verification

Reference

NOTICE

Data

A0 96 B···

First reading

Preset value

A0 98 B···

Reading + Verification

Verification

A0 96 B···

Reading + Verification

Verification

Numerical value

+ 2

"Verification

OK"

Numerical value

+ 2

A0 00 B···

Reading + Verification

Verification

"Verification

NG"

"Verification

OK"

Function

This section describes the preset/verification function.

Preset/Verification Function

This function allows the SR-750 Series to verify the read code data against the registered code data (preset data), and output an OK/NG signal to indicate whether or not they match. This allows the SR-750 Series to perform simple detection of different codes without a sensor or other devices. One set of preset data can be stored in the SR-750 Series (maximum 494 digits). The starting digit (starting position) and range (number of digits) for the verification can be set in the preset data, so even codes with more than 494 digits can be verified. * If the multi 2 read mode or multiple read mode is set, the preset verification

function cannot be used.

The verification starts at the specified starting position on the preset data and continues for the specified number of digits. Data cannot be verified at multiple points.

Registering preset data

Use one of the following procedures to register preset data with the SR-750 Series:

• Read a target code by turning on the external input terminal. * You need to assign the preset data input function to the external input terminal

in advance.

"3-6 Multi-I/O Function (Page 14)"

• Set with the AutoID Network Navigator "5-4 Details of Settings View (Page

34)"

• Set with a setup command "8-3 Details of Configuration Commands (Page

75)"

 Output data format for the preset registration result

The following output data format is used when the preset data is registered.

PR nn : Result data nn = Preset registration result (00 to 05)

Sequence Verification Function

This function allows verification of codes including numerical values which change in series, such as workpiece serial numbers. When the verification is OK, a value is added to/subtracted from the preset value. When the verification is NG, neither addition nor subtraction is performed. When the sequence verification is set, the first data read after the setup or poweron is used as the preset data, and the numerical data for the number of digits set is verified. When the PRESET input terminal is turned on during the automatic increment verification, the current preset value is cleared, and the data to be loaded next is used as the first load data.

The sequence verification requires the following settings:

• Verification method .........Select "Sequential".

• Starting digit ....................Set the number of digits where the value verification

starts.

• No. of digits ("Length") .... For the numerical verification, the acceptable number

of digits is 1 to 9 digits.

• Increment ........................Enter a value used to add to or subtract from the read

code value. (-9999 to 9999)

The following is the operation example when the starting digit is the third one, two digits are referenced and an increment of +2 is specified:

The following restrictions are placed on the sequence verification function:

• The verification results in NG when a value other than a numerical value is read.

• The preset data cannot be registered through communication.

nn Description Result data

00 Preset registration success Read data

01 Preset read failure Read error data

02 The preset effective digit is specified as 0.

The number of digits of read data is less

than the number of digits for preset start.

The preset registration is not possible

because the operation mode is set to multi 2 or multiple read.

05 Two or more "!" exist in preset data.

[null]

Output terminal operation

The output terminals perform the following operation:

• Reading successful and matches preset data ............. OK is output

• Reading successful but does not match preset data ... NG is output

• Read error .................................................................... ERROR is output

• Preset data is registered successfully.......................... PRESET OK is output

By default, the PRESET OK output is not assigned to any of the OUT1 to OUT3 terminals. To connect the PRESET OK output to an

NOTICE

external device, assign the PRESET OK output to an appropriate OUT terminal.

Functions of "!" and "?" in the preset data (wild cards)

Registering "!" or "?" with the preset data increases the flexibility when comparing and verifying the code data against the preset data.

"!" .......This character represents an unlimited number of digits and can be used

when any character for any number of digits is OK. If the preset data is "A B C!", all codes that begin with "ABC" are verified as a match. If the preset data is "!ABC", all codes that end with "ABC" are verified as a match. A maximum of 1 "!" can be registered with the preset data.

"?" ......This character represents 1 digit and can be used when any one character

is OK. If the preset data is "A B??5 6", any 2 characters positioned in ?? are verified as a match. If the preset data has not been registered, "!" is registered instead. Consequently, OK is output when a barcode is read successfully and ERROR is output when reading fails, regardless of the data of the bar code.

By default, the PRESET output is not assigned to any of the OUT1 to OUT4 terminals. To connect the PRESET OK output to an external device, you need to assign the PRESET OK output to an appropriate

E SR-750 UM

OUT terminal.

3-6 Multi-I/O Function

You can assign various operating conditions to the I/O terminals of the SR-750 Series. This section describes operations available with the Multi-I/O function.

Function and Operation of the Input Terminals (IN1 and IN2)

Functions assigned to the input terminals

Only 1 of the following functions can be assigned to each of the input terminals IN1 and IN2:

• Trigger input: Use as the input terminal to start/stop reading codes.

• Preset data input: Use as the input terminal to register preset data.

• Start test mode: Use as an input terminal to activate the specified test mode. (This function cannot be used to start the online test mode.)

• Clear PLC link error: Use as the terminal to clear the PLC link error.

• Tuning operation: Use the terminal to activate the quick calibration function.

• None: Select this option when the terminal is not used as an input terminal.

Use AutoID Network Navigator or setup command to change the setting or assign the desired function.

* By default, the functions are assigned as follows:

IN1: Trigger input IN2: Preset input

Page 15

Input terminal status and operation

Timing input

Reading operation

Timing input

Reading operation

Timing input

Reading operation

NOTICE

OK/NG/ERROR STABLE/UNSTABLE PRESET OK/TUNING OK

Event occurrence

Period of time set for output ON time

The table below shows the relationship between the status of the input terminal and the operation of the assigned function.

Function assigned to the

input terminal

Trigger input (TIMING) Start reading. Stop reading.

Preset input (PRESET) Start preset data registration. Finish preset data registration.

Start test mode. (TEST) Activate the test mode. Quit the test mode.

Stop PLC error Stop error ―

Tuning operation (TUNING) Start quick calibration Quit quick calibration

ON OFF

 Synchronous IN LED

Users can set the SR-750 Series to illuminate its IN LED when the IN1 or IN2 terminal turns on. When both IN1 and IN2 terminals synchronize with the IN LED, the LED illuminates based on the OR condition of the terminal status. (By default, only the IN1 terminal synchronizes with the LED.)

 Input polarity setting

The polarity of the input terminal can be selected from "N.O. (normally open) contact" or "N.C. (normally closed) contact". (By default, "N.O. contact" is selected.) The same input polarity is set for IN1 and IN2.

 Power-on trigger setting

Normally, the input terminal recognizes the change in the input signal (ON/OFF) after the SR-750 Series is turned on and its operation stabilizes. The input terminal does not operate if the input signal turns on before the operation stabilizes (approximately 500 ms after power on). If "Power-on trigger" is enabled, the SR-750 Series recognizes the input ON status during the start-up period, and after the operation stabilizes, it performs the operation specified for the input signal. (By default, "Power-on trigger" is disabled.)

Operation of Norm. open and Norm. closed

 Norm. open (Normally open)

•Normal

 Norm. closed (Normally closed)

•Normal

Function and Operation of the Output Terminals (OUT1, OUT2 and OUT3)

Functions assigned to the output terminals

The following functions can be assigned to the output terminals (OUT1 to OUT3). You can assign one or more functions to each output terminal.

 Result output

This function outputs judgment results according to the SR-750 Series operation.

• OK .................... This signal is output when a bar code is read successfully or

when the comparison/verification against preset data matches.

• NG.................... This signal is output when the comparison/verification against

the preset data does not match.

• ERROR ............ This signal is output when a read error occurs.

• STABLE............ This signal is output when reading is stable ("Matching level

assessment function" or "Code quality verification function" is enabled and the matching level or Code quality verification result exceeds the set threshold).

• UNSTABLE ...... This signal is output when reading is unstable ("Matching level

assessment function" or "Code quality verification function" is enabled and the matching level or Code quality verification result falls below the set threshold).

• PRESET OK .... This signal is output when the preset data is registered

successfully.

• TUNING OK ..... This signal is output when the calibration is complete.

 Operation output

This output function notifies that the SR-750 Series is currently running.

• TRG BUSY.......... During the start-up period, trigger input, preset data

registration, calibration, test mode, or while images are being sent to FTP, bank numbers are being displayed, live view data are being sent, monitoring is being performed, while the laser pointer is on, images are being saved to ROM, the quick setup codes are being read or being scripted

• LOCK BUSY ....... Forced trigger lock is being applied.

• MODE BUSY....... The quick setup code is being read, during test mode

• ERR BUSY.......... Error occurred (buffer full, setting save error)

 External light control output

• EXT. LIGHT......... This signal is output to control external illumination.

• The result outputs (OK, NG, ERROR, STABLE, UNSTABLE, PRESET OK, TUNING OK) and the outputs in operation (TRG BUSY, LOCK BUSY, MODEBUSY, ERR BUSY) and EXT.LIGHT cannot be set for the same terminal.

• EXT.LIGHT can be assigned to OUT3 only. Also, when EXT.LIGHT is assigned to OUT3, no other output can be assigned to OUT3.

• Power-on trigger setting

 Required input duration setting

Users can set the "Required input duration", which is the period required for the ON status of the input terminal to be recognized. The function assigned to the input terminal is activated after the input stays on for specified time or longer. (Required input duration setting range: Selectable from 1 ms, 2 ms or 10 ms; default setting is 1 ms.)

Output terminal operation

The output terminals operate differently depending on the assigned function. There are three types of operations as shown below:

 OK, NG, ERROR, STABLE, UNSTABLE, PRESET OK, and

TUNING OK output

The above signals turn on the output for the specified output ON time when the respective event occurs.

* For the above output functions, a higher priority is assigned to the output of the

function which occurred last.

Consequently, when the next operation occurs during the output ON time of the previous operation, the signal is switched to output the signal of the higher priority function.

E SR-750 UM

Page 16

Timing diagram (When OUT1 outputs an OK signal and then OUT2

Point

Period of time set for output ON time

10 ms 10 ms 10 ms

OUT1 (OK)

Period of time set for output ON time

TRG BUSY/ LOCK BUSY/ MODE BUSY/ ERR BUSY

Period of time set for output ON time

Event occurrence

Event occurrence Event end

Trigger input

EXT.LIGHT output

Scanning

Decoding

Input pulse width Scan delay time

0.09 to 9.99 ms Approx. 16 ms

Exposure time

Image capture time

Decode timeout

period

Decoding process not performed

outputs a NG signal)

OUT1 (OK)

OUT2 (NG)

If the same operation occurs again within the period of the output ON time, the output turns off for 10 ms and then turns on again to output the signal of the next operation. (If the same operation occurs continuously at short intervals, the output turns on for at least 10 ms before it turns off and then turns on again.)

Timing diagram (When OUT1 outputs signals continuously)

Other than the example described above, the signal is switched when any of the following events occurs:

• Change to Test mode/Read quick setup mode

• Laser pointer is turned on

•Error

•Buffer full

3-7 Image Saving Function

This section describes the image saving function of the SR-750 Series.

Image Saving Function

The image saving function is used to save the scan image into RAM/ROM of the SR-750 Series based on the image saving mode settings or to send to PC via FTP communication. Saved images can be used for analyzing causes of read error, etc.

• AutoID Network Navigator setting screen

Type of images to be saved

 TRG BUSY, LOCK BUSY, MODE BUSY and ERR BUSY

output

The above signals are retained until the corresponding event ends. (The period is not affected by the period of time set for the output ON time.)

* If multiple BUSY outputs are assigned to one output terminal, the output signal is

turned off when all events finish.

 EXT.LIGHT (external illumination) output

The above signal is output in synchronization with the scan timing. The output polarity can be selected from "N.O. (normally open) contact" or "N.C. (normally closed) contact". The timing diagram shows the operation for the N.O. contact:

• EXT. LIGHT can be assigned to OUT3 only.

• When EXT. LIGHT is assigned to OUT3, no other output can be assigned to OUT3.

 Latest image

The SR-750 Series stores a scanned image to RAM temporarily and performs decoding process for the image data. The image before decoding process is called the "Latest image".

• The "Latest image" saves up to 10 images to RAM in one time reading operation.

• The type of image of the "Latest image" is set to "L" for the file name.

• To confirm the "Latest image", use the image view function and file view function of the AutoID Network Navigator.

Refer to "5-10 ImageView (Page 52)""5-11 FileView (Page 53)"

 Judged image

An Image for which decoding process is performed and the read result is judged is called "Judged image". The "Judged image" can be set for each judged result.

• Read OK, Verification NG, Unstable image

: Not save or FTP transmission

• Read error : Not save, RAM save, ROM save or FTP

transmission

The "Judged image" is saved according to the following rules.

•

The number of judged images to be saved varies according to the reading operation and image saving mode. (Max. 10)

•

The type of image for the file name of the "Judged image" is set as follows according to the judged result.

Reading success : S Reading error : E Verification NG : N Unstable image : W

: X....... The image was scanned in the burst read mode,

but the decoding process was not performed.

• To confirm the "Judged image" saved into RAM/ROM, use the image view function and file view function of the AutoID Network Navigator.

Refer to "5-10 ImageView (Page 52)""5-11 FileView (Page 53)"

 Capture image

This is an image scanned using the capture function of the SR-750 Series. One image is saved with one-time capture operation. You can select either RAM or FTP transmission as the save destination for capture images.

• Capture operation can be performed using the image view function or operation command.

• The type of image is set to "C" for the file name of the "Capture image".

• To confirm the "Capture image" saved into RAM, use the image view function and file view function of the AutoID Network Navigator.

Refer to "5-10 ImageView (Page 52)""5-11 FileView (Page 53)"

E SR-750 UM

Page 17

Image file name

Trigger input

Latest image

Reading

Success/Failed

Parameter bank

Bank

Images to be saved

Judged image

Bank2Bank3Bank1Bank

Failed Failed Failed Failed

Success

Bank

Trigger input

Latest image

Reading

Success/Failed

Parameter bank

Bank

Images to be saved

Judged image

Bank2Bank3Bank1Bank

Failed Failed

Success Success Success

Bank

Bank3Bank

Trigger input

Latest image

Reading

Success/Failed

Parameter bank

Scanning

Images to be saved

Judged image

Bank

Scanning 1

Failed

Bank

Scanning

Scanning2Scanning3Scanning

Bank

Scanning 5

Scanning 4

Scanning 3

Success

Scanning 2

Failed

Trigger input

Latest image

Reading

Success/Failed

Parameter bank

Bank

Images to be saved

Judged image

Bank2Bank3Bank1Bank

Failed Failed Failed Failed Failed

Bank

Bank3Bank

An image file name is set in the following format.

(1) _ (2) _ (3) _ (4) . (5)

(1) Image count value (3 bytes) IMG : When saved in ROM/RAM

000 to 999 : When sent via FTP

• The number is counted from 000 at startup.

• The counter value is incremented each time one image is sent.

• When the counter value of 999 is incremented, the value returns to

000.

(2) Image type (1 byte) S : OK image

L : Latest E : Error image W : Unstable image N : Comparison NG C : Captured image X : No decoding process

(3) Operation number (2 bytes) 00 : Latest

01 to 10 : From timing ON/OFF to specified

number

#1 to #8 : Burst number (4) Bank number (2 bytes) 01 to 10 (5) Image file extension ROM/RAM : bmp

FTP : bmp or jpg

 When the edit image file name function is enabled

When sending images via FTP transmission with [Edit image file name] – [Use script] set to Enable, image file names can be freely changed. For the edit image file name function, refer to "3-13 Edit data function/Edit image file name function (Page 24)".

Image save mode

The following 3 image save modes are available:

• Save final bank image

• Save images after timing input ON

• Save images of the specified number before trigger input OFF This section describes each mode.

 Read OK/Comparison NG (When the preset/comparison

function is used)/Unstable image

(1) When the reading mode is the single read mode or multi 1 read mode

Only successfully read images of both the latest images and judged images are saved. (This is the example of when the parameter banks 1 to 3 are used.)

(2) When the reading mode is the multi 2 read mode

Judged images and parameter bank images successfully read are all saved. For the latest images, only the image obtained last is saved. (This is the example of when the parameter banks 1 to 3 are used.)

(3) When the reading mode is the burst read mode

For the latest images, all burst scanned images are saved. For the judged images, only the images that can be decoded are saved. (This is the example of when the burst execution bank is 1 and the number of burst scans is 5.)

Save the latest bank image

In this mode, the SR-750 Series performs reading operation and saves the image at the timing when the read result is judged. Depending on the reading mode of the SR-750 Series, saved images and the determination timing for images to be saved are as follows. Refer to "4-4 Read Mode (Page 28)"

 Read error

(1) When the reading mode is the single read mode or multi 1 read mode

When a reading error occurs, all parameter bank images used for reading operation are saved one by one as judged images. For the latest images, only the image obtained last is saved.

E SR-750 UM

Page 18

(2) When the reading mode is the multi 2 read mode

Trigger input

Latest image

Reading

Success/Failed

Parameter bank

Bank

Images to be saved

Judged image

Bank2Bank3Bank1Bank

Failed Failed Failed

Success

Failed

Bank

Trigger input

Latest image

Reading

Success/Failed

Parameter bank

Scanning

Images to be saved

Judged image

Bank

Scanning 1

Failed

Save target

Scanning

Scanning2Scanning3Scanning

Bank

Scanning 5

Failed

Scanning 4

Failed

Scanning 3

Failed

Scanning 2

Failed

Save

target

Save

target

Trigger input

Reading

Success/Failed

Judged image

Images to be saved

Scanning 1

Failed

Save

target

Scanning 5

Failed

Scanning 4

Failed

Scanning 3

Failed

Scanning 2

Failed

Save target

Save

target

The type of image is "X" because decoding process is not performed.

Trigger input

Latest image

Judged image

Parameter bank

Latest

Bank

Latest

n-1

Latest2Latest3Latest

Bank

The SR-750 Series saves images of the s pecified number (n) after the trigger input turns ON.

Latest

Bank

Judged

n-1

Judged

NOTICE

Trigger input

Latest image

Judged image

Parameter bank

Latest

Bank

Latest

n-1

Latest2Latest3Latest

Bank

The SR-750 Series saves images of the specified n umber going back from the image with the read result judged or the image when t he trigger input turns OFF.

Latest

Bank

Judged

n-1

Judged

Trigger input

Code

Data communication

Scanning + decoding

OK/NG/ERROR output

OK/NG ERROR

(When reading is successful) (When re ading failed)

TRG BUSY output

In the multi 2 read mode, if reading judgments (Success or Failed) differ among parameter banks, the judged images of parameter banks that were judged as reading error are saved. For the latest images, the image obtained last is saved.

Save images of the specified number before trigger input OFF

When the read result is judged or the trigger input turns OFF, the SR-750 Series saves images of the specified number before then.

 Image saving timing

The timing when images to be saved are determined is the same as the timing when Read OK/Verification NG is determined, or the trigger input turns OFF and Read error is determined. The number of images to be saved can be specified by using AutoID Network Navigator or setting commands for both the latest images and judged images. (Max. 10 for each)

(3) When the reading mode is the burst read mode

If a read error occurs in the burst read mode, the judged images for the save target burst numbers are only saved. For the latest images, all burst scanned images are saved.

If the trigger input turns off before the decoding process for scanned images are not complete, the judged images as save targets are saved with the type of image "X" (Decoding process not performed).

NOTICE

Save images of the specified number after trigger input ON

When the read result is judged, the SR-750 Series saves images of the specified number after the reading operation began.

 Image saving timing

The timing when images to be saved are determined is the same as the timing when Read OK/Verification NG/Read error is judged. The number of images to be saved can be specified by using AutoID Network Navigator or setting commands for both the latest images and judged images. (Max. 10 for each)

·····

• Image number is counted in the obtained order as 1, 2, 3···.

• When the reading mode is the multi 1 read mode, image saving is impossible with this operation.

• When the reading result can be judged before reaching the specified number, the images until that point are saved.

• When the reading mode is the burst read mode, up to 8 images are saved. In the burst read mode, the SR-750 Series saves images of the specified number (burst scan count) for both the latest images and judged images.

3-8 Silent Mode

This section describes the silent mode of the SR-750 Series.

Silent mode

A typical code reader outputs data of the result when the code is read or the read error code when it is not read. The SR-750 Series can be configured to restrain data communication and not to output the result data to the host computer. This function is called "Silent mode". For example, if the application only uses the OK, NG or Read Error terminal outputs, this information can be suppressed. By configuring the SR-750 Series not to send all data, it eliminates the time required for data transmission to/from the host computer. As a result, overall reading time can be reduced.

 Timing diagram (when OK/NG/ERROR data is restrained)

NOTICE

E SR-750 UM

·····

• When the reading mode is the multi 1 read mode, image saving is impossible with this operation.

• When the reading result can be judged before reaching the specified number, the images until that point are saved.

Only data is not sent as shown above, but the OUT output terminal performs normal operation. * Even with the silent mode set, images can be saved with the condition set using

the image save function. Refer to "3-7 Image Saving Function (Page 16)"

Page 19

Silent mode setting procedure

The following 2 procedures for setting silent mode are available:

• Setting using the AutoID Network Navigator

• Setting with a command

Data subject to data communication restraint

By configuring the SR-750 Series, the following data communication can be restrained.



Setting items and setting details using the AutoID Network Navigator

Setting item Data subject to output restraint

Read (Comparison) OK

Comparison NG

Read ERROR Read error data

Stable Reading (OK/NG) Stable reading data

Unstable Reading (OK/NG) Unstable reading data

Preset Result Preset registration result data

Test Mode Measured data in test mode

3-9

SR-600 Compatible Output Mode

Read data Read data judged as Comparison OK as a result of preset verification.

Preset Comparison NG data Read data judged as Comparison NG as a result of preset verification.

Read data whose matching level or Code quality verification result is judged as more than the threshold

Read data whose matching level or Code quality verification result is judged as less than the threshold

This section describes the SR-600 compatible output mode of the SR-750 Series.

SR-600 compatible output mode

The SR-750 Series supports the Ethernet communication, so the operation command format and response code format have been changed from the previous SR-600 Series. When using the SR-750 Series in the SR-600 Series operation process or using the control program for the SR-600 Series, setting the SR-600 compatible output mode to Enable results in reduction in man-hours for program change.

• Standard mode

(1) LON

SR-750 PC or PLC

(2) OK, LON

(3) Read data

• SR-600 compatible output mode

(1) LON

SR-750 PC or PLC

(2) Read data

SR-600 compatible output mode functions

Commands and responses set to Enable in the SR-600 compatible output mode are as follows.

 Operation commands

Command

name

Trigger input ON LON

Trigger input ON (Bank settings)

Trigger input OFF

Start preset data registration

End preset data registration

Start reading the quick setup code

End reading the quick setup code

Check the quick setup code reading status

Check the input terminal status

Output terminal ON control (individual control)

Command

LONbb

LON, bb

LOFF OK, LOFF ER, LOFF, ee (N/A) (N/A)

PRON OK, PRON

PROFF OK, PROFF

RCON OK, RCON

RCOFF OK, RCOFF

RCCHK

INCHK, m

INmCHK

OUTON, m OK, OUTON

OUTmON OK, OUTmON

SR-750 Series normal output

Response Error code Response Error code

OK, LON ER, LON, ee (N/A) (N/A)

ER, PRON,

ER, PROFF,

ER, RCON,

ER, RCOFF,

OK, RCCHK,

Obtained

value

OK, INCHK,

Obtained

value

OK, INmCHK,

Obtained

value

ER, RCCHK, eeObtained

ER, INCHK,

ER, INmCHK,

ER, OUTON,

ER,

OUTmON, ee

SR-600 Compatible output

Obtained

(N/A) (N/A)

OK ERRee

value

ERRee

Command

name

Output terminal OFF control (individual control)

Output terminal ON control (batch control)

Output terminal OFF control (batch control)

Soft reset RESET OK, RESET (N/A) OK (N/A)

Clearing the send buffer

Check reading history

Capture

Start tuning

Cancel tuning TQUIT OK, TQUIT

Obtain the alternate order

Initialize the parameter bank

Save setting SAVE OK, SAVE ER, SAVE, ee OK ERRee

Initialize the settings

Obtain the command status

Obtain the error status

Erase error images

Command

OUTOFF, m OK, OUTOFF

OUTmOFF

ALLON OK, ALLON

ALLOFF OK, ALLOFF

SHOTbb

SHOT, bb

TUNE, bb

TUNEbb

BANKORDER

BANKCLR,

BANKCLRb

CMDSTAT

ERRSTAT

ICLR, bb

ICLRbb

SR-750 Series normal output

Response Error code Response Error code

OUTmOFF

BCLR OK, BCLR (N/A) OK (N/A)

NUM

DFLT OK, DFLT ER, DFLT, ee OK ERRee

OK, NUM,

Obtained

value

OK, SHOT,

File name

OK, TUNE ER, TUNE, ee OK ERRee

BANKORDER, Obtained value

BANKCLR

CMDSTAT,

Obtained

value

ERRSTAT,

Obtained

value

OK, ICLR ER, ICLR, ee OK ERRee

ER, OUTOFF,

OK,

ER,

OUTmOFF,

ER, ALLON,

ER, ALLOFF,

ER, NUM, ee

ER, SHOT, ee OK ERRee

ER, TQUIT,

ER,

BANKORDER,

ER,

BANKCLR, ee

(N/A)

SR-600 Compatible output

Obtained

value

Obtained

value

Obtained

value

Obtained

value

Obtained

value

ERRee

OK ERRee

ERRee

OK ERRee

ERRee

OK ERRee

(N/A)

 Test mode commands

Command

name

Start reading rate test mode (offline)

Start reading rate test mode (online)

Start processing time test mode (offline)

Start processing time test mode (online)

Start position test mode (offline)

End test mode (offline)

End test mode (online)

Command

TEST1

TEST1bb

#TEST1

#TEST1bb

TEST2

TEST2bb

#TEST2

#TEST2bb

#TEST3

#TEST3bb

SR-750 Series normal output

Response Error code Response Error code

OK, TEST1

OK, #TEST1

OK, TEST2

OK, #TEST2

OK, TEST3

QUIT OK, QUIT ER, QUIT, ee OK ERRee

#QUIT OK, #QUIT ER, #QUIT, ee OK ERRee

ER, TEST1,

ER, #TEST1,

ER, TEST2,

ER, #TEST2,

ER, TEST3,

* bb : Parameter bank No.

ee : Error code m: Pin No. Obtained value : Value obtained after command operation

SR-600 Compatible output

OK ERReeTEST1, bb

OK ERRee#TEST1, bb

OK ERReeTEST2, bb

OK ERRee#TEST2, bb

OK ERRee#TEST3, bb

How to set the SR-600 Series compatible output mode

Change the setting according to the following methods to set the SR-600 Series compatible output mode to Enable.

• Change the setting using AutoID Network Navigator. On the AutoID Network Navigator, select [Table] tab - [Others] - [Trigger command response] - [Specify response character], and then specify SR-600 compatible. (Page 48)

• Send the setting command to set

E SR-750 UM

Page 20

3-10

Point

This section describes the quick setup code.

Batch Setting Code

Quick Setup Code

Users can print the settings specified with AutoID Network Navigator as 2D code and read the code with the SR-750 Series to change all the settings at once. When printing the quick setup code, use the AutoID Network Navigator quick setup code printing function. Since the settings of the SR-750 Series can be changed by reading the quick setup code, you can easily change the settings even in a location where a computer cannot be used.

 Print image

 Sending the quick setup code reading commands

Send the quick setup code reading command (RCON) to read the quick setup code.

1 Send the "RCON" command from the control device.

When the SR-750 Series receives the command normally, it returns "OK, RCON", and "C" and "0" are displayed alternately on the multiple LED indicator of the SR-750 main unit.

2 Read the quick setup code.

According to the code reading status, values displayed on the multiple LED indicator of the SR-750 main unit change.

3 When all quick setup codes are read, "d" is displayed on the multiple

LED indicator of the SR-750 main unit.

4 Send the "RCOFF" command from the control device.

When the SR-750 Series receives the command normally, it returns "OK, RCOFF", and the quick setup code reading operation finishes. (After the setting is reflected, "d" on the multiple LED goes off.)

• While reading the quick setup code, the TRG BUSY and MODE BUSY outputs turn ON.

• To cancel the quick setup code reading operation, send the "RCOFF" command.

When reading the quick setup code with the high-resolution type unit (SR-750HA), you must use a printer with high print quality. When a printer with low print quality is used, the cells in the 2D code may bleed and become unreadable.

How to read quick setup codes

Use one of the following methods to read the quick setup code

 Reading the quick setup code using the TUNE button

1 Press and hold the TUNE button on the SR-750 Series for at least 4

seconds.

When the quick setup code reading operation starts, "C" and "O" are displayed alternately on the multiple LED indicator of the SR-750 main unit.

2 Read the quick setup code.

According to the code reading status, values displayed on the multiple LED indicator of the SR-750 main unit change.

3 When all quick setup codes are read, "d" is displayed on the multiple

LED indicator of the SR-750 main unit.

4 Press the TUNE button once briefly to finish the quick setup code

reading operation.

• While reading the quick setup code, the TRG BUSY and MODE BUSY outputs turn ON.

• To cancel the quick setup code reading operation, press the TUNE button once briefly. When "F" is displayed on the multiple LED display, press the TUNE button once briefly again.

3-11

Code quality verification function

This section describes the Code quality verification function.

Code quality verification function for the SR-750 Series

The Code quality verification function evaluates the level (High/Low) of total grade based on the verification result output and the set threshold by verifying the 2D code scanned with the SR-750 Series according to the marking quality evaluation specified by a third-party institution. The SR-750 Series provides the following 2D code verifications according to the Code quality verification standards.

Standards Description

ISO/IEC15415

ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006)

SAE AS9132

SEMI T10-0701

Important

Note that this Code quality verification function is designed to evaluate marking quality of the standards-compliant 2D codes of the images scanned with the SR-750 Series, but cannot be used as an official 2D code verification device.

Reference

When you select ISO/IEC15415, you can perform code quality verification of standalone PDF 417 and Micro PDF codes. For information on the verification items, see "Code Verification of Japanese Pharmaceutical Drugs" in the "SR-750 Series Additional Functions Manual."

This is the 2D code marking quality evaluation standard established by International Organization for Standardization. This is mainly used to evaluate 2D codes printed on labels.

This is the DPM (Direct Part Marking) 2D code marking quality evaluation standard established by Automatic Identification Manufacturers. This is based on ISO/IEC15415. This was also standardized by International Organization for Standardization in 2011.

This is the DataMatrix code marking quality evaluation standard established by SAE (Society of Automotive Engineers) and used by the aerospace industry.

This is the DataMatrix code marking quality evaluation standard established by SEMI (Semiconductor Equipment and Materials International) and printed on semiconductor-related materials.

E SR-750 UM

Page 21

Code quality verification function settings

Point

This section describes the setting method of the Code quality verification function and the setting items.

Setting method for the Code quality verification function

To use the Code quality verification function, you need to enable the verification settings you wish to use. (1) Setting using the AutoID Network Navigator.

Press the "Code quality verification" button on the "Operation" tab in the Settings view, and then check the desired verification standard.

(2) Setting using the setup commands

Send commands that enable the verification functions you wish to use.

"8-3 Details of Configuration Commands - Reading operation setting (Page 77)"

When the Code quality verification function is enabled, the decode time becomes longer than when it is disabled. Perform calibration after enabling the Code quality verification function or set the decode timeout period required for reading. Use the tact measurement test mode to confirm there is no problem with reading time for operation. ( "3-4 Test Mode" (Page 12))

Append Code quality verification result data

To append the Code quality verification result data, the additional data setting and data format setting are required.

 Additional data setting

Select "Operation" - "Additional data" on the "Table" tab in the Settings view, and then set verification results you wish to append as data to "Enable".

"5-4 Details of Settings View - [Table] tab (Page 43 or later)" "3-11 Code quality verification function - Verification items description (Page 21

or later)"

 Data format setting

Make the setting relating to the data format. Set the following three items.

• Select expression of grades : Set the grade indication of the verification result to either Alphabet or Numeric. (ISO/IEC15415 and ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006) only)

• Append detailed verification result : Set whether to append verification items of each standard to the total grade. (ISO/IEC15415, ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006) and SAE AS9132 only)

• Append values : Set whether to append evaluation values of each verification item used for verification result evaluation. (ISO/IEC15415, ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006) and SAE AS9132 only)

"7-2 Data Communication Format (Page 63)"

Code quality verification function Evaluation standard

Evaluation by the Code quality verification function is made for the total evaluation grade. Evaluation standards are as follows.

 ISO/IEC15415, ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006)

High: Verification result >= Threshold value Low: Verification result < Threshold value

 SAE AS9132

High: Verification result = Pass Low: Verification result = Fail

Important

SEMI T10-0701 does not offer total evaluation grade and cannot make evaluations. This means that functions that can be used after evaluation cannot be used with SEMI T10-0701.

Functions that can use evaluation results of the Code quality verification function

 STABLE terminal output, UNSTABLE terminal output

STABLE terminal output......... This is output when the total evaluation grade is the

UNSTABLE terminal output ... This is output when the total evaluation grade is less

( "3-6 Multi-I/O Function (Page 14)")

threshold value or more.

than the threshold value.

 Saving images of unstable reading

When the total evaluation grade is less than the threshold value, scanned images are saved according to the setting (If the FTP transmission is set, images are sent to the connection destination.). ( "3-7 Image Saving Function (Page 16)")

 Silent mode

When the total evaluation grade is more or less than the threshold value, data communication can be restrained using the silent mode. ( "3-8 Silent Mode (Page 18)")

Point

When multiple verifications are in process, these functions operate in priority to the result which is less than the threshold value.

Note when using the Code quality verification function

Code quality verification results may change according to the setting of the parameter bank for scanning. If the color or contrast of the 2D code and background change, consider preparing the parameter bank setting used as standard and performing the Code quality verification using the setting.

Verification items description

ISO/IEC 15415

Decode success/failure DEC (Decode)

Description Evaluates whether decoding is possible or not.

Calculation formula

Criterion ―

Symbol contrast SC (Symbol Contrast)

Evaluates the difference between the

Description

Calculation formula

Criterion

maximum brightness value (Rmax) and minimum brightness value (Rmin) in the code area.

SC = (Rmax-Rmin)/255

Rmax : Maximum brightness value Rmin : Minimum brightness value

A : more than 0.70 B : 0.55 to 0.70 C : 0.40 to 0.55 D : 0.20 to 0.40 F : less than 0.20

―

E SR-750 UM

Page 22

Modulation MOD (Modulation)

Description

Calculation formula

Criterion ―

Description

Calculation formula

Criterion ―

Description

Calculation formula

Criterion ―

Description

Calculation formula

Criterion ―

Description

Calculation formula

Criterion ―

Evaluates the variation degree in cell brightness

Each cell's MOD = 2 ½ (abs (R-GT)/SC)

R : Brightness value GT : Binarization threshold value SC : Symbol contrast

Reflectance margin RM (Reflectance Margin)

Evaluates the variation degree in cell brightness with black and white of the correct cell considered.

[White cell] R >= GT → MARGIN = 2 ½ (R-GT)/SC R < GT → MARGIN = 0 [Black cell] R < GT → MARGIN = 2 ½ (GT-R)/SC R >= → MARGIN = 0

MARGIN : Margin of each cell R : Brightness value GT : Binarization threshold value SC : Symbol contrast

Fixed pattern damage FPD (Fixed Pattern Damage)

Evaluates the degree of the fixed pattern damage (area on the right) dependent on the code type.

Format information damage

Evaluates the format information damage degree of QR code.

Version information damage

Evaluates the version information damage degree of QR code (Model 2, version 2 and later versions).

Axial nonuniformity AN (Axial Nonuniformity)

Description

―

(Format Information Damage)

―

(Version Information Damage)

―

FID

VID

Calculation formula

Criterion

Description

Calculation formula

Criterion

Description

Calculation formula

Criterion

Description

Calculation formula

Criterion

Description

Calculation formula

Criterion

Evaluates the distortion degree in vertical and horizontal size of the code.

AN = abs (Xavg = Yavg)/((Xavg = Yavg)/2)

Xavg : Average cell size in horizontal

direction

Yavg : Vertical cell size in horizontal

direction

A : less than 0.06 B : 0.06 to 0.08 C : 0.08 to 0.10 D : 0.10 to 0.12 F : more than 0.12

Grid nonuniformity GN (Grid Nonuniformity)

Evaluates the maximum position slip of each cell

GN = Hmax/X

Hmax : Maximum position slip amount X : Cell size

A : less than 0.38 B : 0.38 to 0.50 C : 0.50 to 0.63 D : 0.63 to 0.75 F : more than 0.75

Unused error correction

Evaluates the ratio of error correction unused at the time of decoding.

UEC = 1.0 - ((e + 2t)/(d - p))

e : Number of code words that cannot be

read t : Number of error code words d : Number of error corrected code words p : Number of error detected code words

A : more than 0.62 B : 0.50 to 0.62 C : 0.37 to 0.50 D : 0.25 to 0.37 F : less than 0.25

Print growth (horizontal)

Evaluates the mark cell growth in the horizontal direction.

(D - 0.5)/0.15

D : On the horizontal clock pattern

Ratio of the number of pixels of mark

cell

A : -0.50 to 0.50 B : -0.70 to -0.50 or 0.50 to 0.70 C : -0.85 to -0.70 or 0.70 to 0.85 D : -1.00 to -0.85 or 0.85 to 1.00 F : less than -1.00 or more than 1.00

Print growth (vertical) PGV (Print Growth Vertical)

Evaluates the mark cell growth in the vertical direction.

(D - 0.5)/0.15

D : On the vertical clock pattern

Ratio of the number of pixels of mark

cell

A : -0.50 to 0.50 B : -0.70 to -0.50 or 0.50 to 0.70 C : -0.85 to -0.70 or 0.70 to 0.85 D : -1.00 to -0.85 or 0.85 to 1.00 F : less than -1.00 or more than 1.00

(Unused Error Correction)

UEC

―

PGH

(Print Growth Horizontal)

E SR-750 UM

Page 23

ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006)

Decode success/failure DEC (Decode)

Description Evaluates whether decoding is possible or not.

Calculation formula

Criterion ―

Cell contrast CC (Cell Contrast)

Description

Calculation formula

Criterion

Description

Calculation formula

Criterion ―

Description

Calculation formula

Criterion ―

Description

Calculation formula

Criterion ―

Description

Calculation formula

Criterion ―

Evaluates the difference between the average brightness value of bright cell (ML) and average brightness value of dark cell (MD).

CC = (ML - MD)/ML

ML : Average brightness value of bright

cell

MD : Average brightness value of dark

cell

A : more than 0.30 B : 0.25 to 0.30 C : 0.20 to 0.25 D : 0.15 to 0.20 F : less than 0.15

Cell modulation CM (Cell Modulation)

Evaluates the variation degree in cell brightness

[White cell] CM = (R - GT)/(ML - GT) (When R ≥ GT) [Black cell] CM = (GT- R)/(GT- MD) (When R < GT)

R : Brightness value GT : Binarization threshold value ML :

Average brightness value of bright cell

MD :

Average brightness value of dark cell

Reflectance margin RM (Reflectance Margin)

Evaluates the variation degree in cell brightness with black and white of the correct cell considered.

[White cell] R >= MARGIN = (R-GT)/(ML-GT) R < GT → MARGIN = 0 [Black cell] R < GT→MARGIN = (GT-R)/(GT-MD) R >= → MARGIN = 0

MARGIN : Margin of each cell R : Brightness value GT : Binarization threshold value CC : Cell contrast

Fixed pattern damage FPD (Fixed Pattern Damage)

Evaluates the degree of the fixed pattern damage (area on the right) dependent on the code type.

Format information damage

Evaluates the format information damage degree of QR code.

―

(Format Information Damage)

FID

Version information damage

Description

Calculation formula

Criterion ―

Description

Calculation formula

Criterion

Description

Calculation formula

Criterion

Description

Calculation formula

Criterion

Description

Calculation formula

Criterion

Description

Calculation formula

Criterion

Evaluates the version information damage degree of QR code (Model 2, version 2 and later versions).

Axial nonuniformity AN (Axial Nonuniformity)

Evaluates the distortion degree in vertical and horizontal size of the code.

AN = abs (Xavg - Yavg)/((Xavg + Yavg)/2)

Xavg : Average cell size in horizontal

direction

Yavg : Vertical cell size in horizontal

direction

A : less than 0.06 B : 0.06 to 0.08 C : 0.08 to 0.10 D : 0.10 to 0.12 F : more than 0.12

Grid nonuniformity GN (Grid Nonuniformity)

Evaluates the maximum position slip of each cell

GN = Hmax/X

Hmax : Maximum position slip amount X : Cell size

A : less than 0.38 B : 0.38 to 0.50 C : 0.50 to 0.63 D : 0.63 to 0.75 F : more than 0.75

Unused error correction

Evaluates the ratio of error correction unused at the time of decoding.

UEC = 1.0 - ((e + 2t)/(d - p))

e : Number of code words that cannot be

read t : Number of error code words d : Number of error corrected code words p : Number of error detected code words

A : more than 0.62 B : 0.50 to 0.62 C : 0.37 to 0.50 D : 0.25 to 0.37 F : less than 0.25

Print growth (horizontal)

Evaluates the mark cell growth in the horizontal direction.

(D - 0.5)/0.15

D : On the horizontal clock pattern

Ratio of the number of pixels of mark

cell

A : -0.50 to 0.50 B : -0.70 to -0.50 or 0.50 to 0.70 C : -0.85 to -0.70 or 0.70 to 0.85 D : -1.00 to -0.85 or 0.85 to 1.00 F : less than -1.00 or more than 1.00

Print growth (vertical) PGV (Print Growth Vertical)

Evaluates the mark cell growth in the vertical direction.

(D - 0.5)/0.15

D : On the vertical clock pattern

Ratio of the number of pixels of mark

cell

A : -0.50 to 0.50 B : -0.70 to -0.50 or 0.50 to 0.70 C : -0.85 to -0.70 or 0.70 to 0.85 D : -1.00 to -0.85 or 0.85 to 1.00 F : less than -1.00 or more than 1.00

(Version Information Damage)

―

(Unused Error Correction)

(Print Growth Horizontal)

VID

UEC

―

PGH

E SR-750 UM

Page 24

3-12

Timing input

Code

Data communication

Duplicate reading prevention

Timing input

Code

Data communication

Duplicate reading prevention

[1] Creating the script file [2] Changing the script

execution setting

[3] Transferring the script file

Duplicate reading prevention interval reset

The duplicate read prevention function is equipped with the Multi1 reading mode not to read codes again that have been read once. The working time of this duplicate reading prevention function is set by the duplicate reading prevention interval. Two types of the duplicate reading prevention interval reset operation have been prepared with the SR-750 Series.

Types of the duplicate reading prevention interval reset

Two types of the duplicate reading prevention interval reset

• Reset when a code is read.

• Do not reset during duplicate reading prevention interval.

This section describes each operation.

Reset when a code is read.

The duplicate reading prevention function works for one data most recently read. If different codes are read, the duplicate reading prevention interval is reset and the duplicate reading prevention function works for the newly read code data. The duplicate reading prevention interval count starts at the timing when the last code is read.

 Timing chart

(1) (1) (2) (1) (2) (2)

Duplicate reading

(1) (2) (1) (2) (2)

• When reading is successful, reading continues using the successful bank until a reading error occurs.

• If codes with the same contents are read in series, adjust the passing time longer than the time set with the duplicate reading prevention interval (setting range: 100 to 25500 ms). Codes with different contents can be read in series.

• The timing to start measuring the duplicate reading prevention interval is when the code that was read is outside the field of vision.

Do not reset during duplicate reading prevention interval.

The duplicate reading prevention function works for all codes read within the set duplicate reading prevention interval from when the timing input was done and the first code is read. The duplicate reading prevention function works again when the next code is read after the duplicate reading prevention interval finishes.

 Timing chart

prevention interval

Important

If multiple codes in the same type are seen in the field of view at the same time, take one of the following methods.

• Prepare multiple parameter banks with the read length restricted, and make the setting so the parameter banks are switched for each code.

• Prepare multiple parameter banks with the decoding area restricted, and make the setting so the parameter banks are switched for each code.

* When Multi read (setting within 1 parameter bank) is set to

Enable, if the code data that was read once matches with any of the multiple read code data in 1 scan, not all code data read in the scan are not output.

3-13

Edit data function/Edit image file name function

With the edit data function, read data can be edited into a desired data format. With the edit image file name function, when sending image files to upper ranks via FTP, the image file names can be edited into desired file names.

The edit data function and edit image file name function can do the following.

 Edit data (Basic)

• Four arithmetic operations (add, subtract, multiply and divide)

• Conditional branching

• Adding arbitrary characters

• Extracting and combining arbitrary digits

 Edit data (Advanced)

Various types of data can be built using four arithmetic operations, conditional branching, etc. from appended data information, etc. [Example]

• Code rotation angle (Calculated from top coordinates)

 Edit image file name

• Time stamp*

• Append read data

Important

• The edit image file name function is available only for images sent via FTP. This does not function for images saved in RAM and ROM.

• This does not support quick setup codes.

* When using the time stamp, enable the SNTP function of SR-750

and connect to the SNTP server. (For SNTP setting items, refer to Page 48.)

Procedure for setting the edit data function and edit image file name function

The edit data function and the edit image file name function can be used by sending the file which contains the program of Script to SR-750 and enabling the "Use script file" setting.

Setting procedure

(1) (2) (1) (3) (2) (1) (2) (2)

Duplicate reading prevention interval

(1) (2) (3) (1) (2)

• Regardless of reading success or reading error, codes are read alternating parameter banks.

• Amount of data memorized during the duplicate reading prevention interval: Up to 160 codes, total of 10 Kbytes

E SR-750 UM

[1] Creating the script file

Create the script file (FmtSet.lua) and write the program using a text editor such as notepad.exe. * For programming method, refer to "SR-D100/750 Series Script Reference".

Page 25

[2] Changing the script execution setting

Important

Timing input

Script file transfer

Data Image file name

Using the AutoID Network Navigator, set the script execution setting of the SR750 Series to "Enable". This must be set for the edit data function and the edit image file name function respectively. [Edit data function - Script execution setting item]

Handing of the script file when settings are changed, etc.

This section describes how to handles the script file when restoring to the default settings or using the changeover function.

Operation contents FmtSet.lua

AutoID Network Navigator "Retrieve

Configuration"

AutoID Network Navigator "Send

AutoID Network Navigator "Default Settings" Remains.

command

Configuration"

Send or delete by FileView Transmission and deletion possible from PC.

Reading quick setup codes Remains.

SAVE Remains.

Send

LOAD Remains.

DFLT Remains.

Receives with the configuration file at the

same time.

Sends with the configuration file at the same

time.

[Edit image file name function - Script execution setting item]

[3] Transferring the script file

Transfer the script file (FmtSet.lua) to the SR-D100 Series. Following are the transfer methods.

• Sending configuration of AutoID Network Navigator

• Transferring only the script file from the AutoID Network Navigator terminal

• Transferring using the Fileview software

• Transferring using the FTP

When transferring the script file using the Fileview software or the FTP, set the file name to "FmtSet.Lua".

Script file reflection timing

Even if the script file is in operation, transfer is possible each time by using the FTP. In this case, the reflection timing of the script program is from the timing ON after file transfer.

 Timing chart

When executing the script file - status confirmation command

 Obtaining the script processing time

Send command SCPTIME Response OK, SCPTIME, now=AAus, max=BBus, min=CCus

AA: Returns the most recent script processing time. BB: Returns the maximum value of the processing time. CC: Returns the minimum value of the processing time.

• Returns the processing time of script executed after power ON.

 Script debug setting

Send command SCPDBG, n Response OK, SCPDBG

n= 0: Script debug OFF n=1: Script debug ON

• This sets whether to output debug from the script file to the command port or not.

• Setting the debug ON executes print(str) and outputs data.

 Obtaining the script error results

Send command SCPERR Response

OK, SCPERR, mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm mm… : Script error character string

• This returns the details of script error.

 Obtaining the script version

Send command SCPVER Response OK, SCPVER, mmmm, nnnn

mm...: Script library version nn… : FmtSet.lua version

• FmtSet.Lua version is the value stored in variable name "SCPVERSION" within the FmtSet.Lua file.

• This returns the script library version and the FmtSet.lua version.

• If the script library does not exist, the error code 12 is returned.

* The script library is a library file to use the edit data function and the edit image

file name function.

(Only when FmtSet.lua exists and the version is defined)

AA B

E SR-750 UM

Page 26

4-1 Reading Operations

(1) Trigger input

(2) S

canning +

image transfer

(3) Decoding

processing

(4) D

ata

communication

Operation of parameter bank 1

Operation of parameter bank 2

Read data

Trigger input

Scanning

Input time constant

Scan delay time

(1) Trigger input

(2) Parameter bank 1

operation Internal bank retry count = a

(3) Parameter bank 2

operation Internal bank retry count = b

Scanning +

decoding

0 times 1 time

2 times

a times

0 times 1 time b times

Scanning +

decoding

Scanning +

decoding

Scanning +

decoding

Scanning +

decoding

Scanning +

decoding

Trigger input

Code

Scanning + decoding

Data communication

TRG BUSY output

(When reading is successful) (When reading failed)

OK/NG/ERROR output

Data length + (1: When parit y is used) + Start/stop bits

Baud rate

This section describes the reading conditions of the SR-750 Series.

Steps of Read Operation

The SR-750 Series follow the read sequence below:

(1) Trigger input processing : Trigger input is verified and light is

controlled.

(2) Scanning + image transfer : The image is scanned within the specified

exposure time and the image is transferred.

(3) Decoding processing : The captured image is filtered and the code

is processed (decoded).

(4) Data communication processing : The decoded results are output as data.

Internal bank retry count

When the internal bank retry count is set, 1 parameter bank is repeated. When decoding cannot be complete within the specified internal bank retry count, operation to switch to the next parameter bank is possible. If reading operation becomes unstable due to vibration of the workpiece, setting the internal bank retry count enables stable reading.

 Timing Chart

Since (2) and (3) above are based on the settings registered with the parameter banks, operation is repeated using alternate banks until a code is read or the trigger input is turned off.

Specify the following operations for the above processing:

• Timing Mode Specify from level trigger or one-shot trigger.

• Data Transmission Select "Send after read" or "Send after timing OFF".

• Read mode Specify from Single, Multi1, Multi 2 or burst.

Timing Chart

This section describes the steps of basic operations of the SR-750 Series. Operating conditions are as follows:

• Timing Mode : Level trigger

• Timing to send data : Send after read

• Read mode : Single

• Parameter bank : Set 2 banks, alternate mode

A: Input time constant + Scan delay time B: Exposure time set for each parameter bank (max. 9.99 ms) C: Image transfer time (approx. 16 ms) D: Decode time out period set for each parameter bank (Max. 2550 ms) F: Decoding time when reading is successful

• The above is the image when reading is successful. For read error, B, C and D are repeated continuously and read error data is output when the trigger input is turned off.

Scan delay time

• The internal bank retry count can be set within the range from 0 to 32. (Factory setting: 0)

• If a large number is set for the internal bank retry count and multiple parameter banks are registered, reading time per time will become longer. Secure sufficient reading time so that reading can be stable.

4-2 Timing Mode

This section describes the timing mode of the SR-750 Series.

Type of timing mode

The SR-750 Series provides the following 2 types of timing mode.

• Level trigger

• One-shot trigger

For the remainder of this section, assume the following settings are used:

• Read mode : Single

• Data Transmission : Send after read

• Output terminal settings OUT1 = OK

OUT2 = NG + ERROR

OUT3 = TRG BUSY * Output terminal settings "3-6 Multi-I/O Function (Page 14)" * For convenience sake, the timing chart does not indicate the input pulse width +

scan delay time.

Level trigger

When the trigger input turns on, the SR-750 Series turns on the illumination to start scanning. When a code is read successfully, it stops illumination and sends the data. If the SR-750 Series fails to read a code, it stops illumination when the trigger input turns off and sends a reading error.

 Timing Chart

When the entry timing of the target to be conveyed is shifted from the input timing of the timing sensor, set the "scan delay time". This makes it possible to start scanning under optimum read conditions by setting the delay for the timing at which emission of light of the SR-750 begins.

• The time can be set between 0 and 255 ms in increments of 1 ms (Default: 0 ms).

• Set the scan delay period for the parameter bank.

E SR-750 UM

OK/NG ERROR

• Set the trigger input so it stays ON from the reading start time until reading end

time.

• The illumination of the SR-750 Series turns on after the trigger input has been

activated for the specified input time constant.

• The input time constant for the trigger input can be changed to 1 ms, 2 ms, or 10

ms.

• The RS-232C data communication time can be obtained using the following

equation:

Data communication time= × (Number of digits of data to be sent +

Number of characters of header and terminator)

• The ON time for the OK/NG/ERROR output can be set within the range of 10 to

2550 ms (Default: 500 ms).

Page 27

Point

When a code is read at an interval shorter than the specified

Reference

Point

OK/NG ERROR

Trigger input

Code

Scanning + decoding

Data communication

TRG BUSY output

(When reading is successful)

(When reading failed)

One-shot trigger duration One-shot trigger duration

OK/NG/ERROR output

Trigger input

Code

Scanning + decoding

Data communication

TRG BUSY output

(When reading is successful) (When reading fai led)

OK/NG/ERROR output

Trigger input

Code

Scanning + decoding

Data communication

TRG BUSY output

(When reading is successful)

(When reading failed)

One-shot trigger duration One-shot trigger duration

OK/NG/ERROR output

output ON time, the OK/NG/ERROR output turns off even if the output ON time of the previous output signal has not elapsed, and a new output signal turns on for the specified output ON time. If output terminal operations of the same type occur successively (such as OK→OK), the previous output signal turns off for 10 ms, and then the new output signal turns on. Refer to "Page 15 Function and Operation of the Output Terminals (OUT1, OUT2 and OUT3)".

The TRG BUSY output turns on from the time the trigger input turns on to the time the code reading is complete or the trigger input is turned off.

One-shot trigger

When the SR-750 Series detects that the trigger input is on, it turns on the lighting for the specified one-shot trigger duration to scan a code. When a code is read successfully, it stops illumination and sends the data. Other operations are the same as those for the level trigger. Use the one-shot trigger if the ON time of the trigger input is extremely short or if you want to fix the read time.

 Timing Chart

4-3 Data Transmission Timing

This section describes the data transmission timing of the SR-750 Series.

Type of data transmission timing

The SR-750 Series offers the following 2 options for outputting the read data and OK/NG/ERROR signals:

• Send after reading

• Send after timing OFF Select the appropriate type for your application. * For the sake of simplicity, Input time constant + Scan delay time is not shown in

the timing chart.

Send after reading

The SR-750 Series outputs read data and an OK/NG signal as soon as it completes reading codes. If the SR-750 Series fails to read a code, it outputs a read error code and an ERROR signal at the point when the timing signal turns off. The timing charts are the same as those shown in "Timing Mode".

"4-2 Timing Mode (Page 26)"

Send after timing OFF

When "Send after timing OFF" is selected, the SR-750 Series outputs read data and an OK/NG/ERROR signal at the next timing point for the specified trigger type. Use this type to output data and output signals with the same timing.

 Timing Chart for the level trigger

When the trigger input turns off, read data and OK/NG/ERROR signal are output.

• When the trigger input stays on for the specified input time constant, the illumination of the SR-750 Series turns on and the scanning begins. When the reading is complete, the illumination stops.

• The input time constant for the trigger input can be changed to 1 ms, 2 ms, or 10 ms.

• The one-shot trigger duration can be changed within the range of 100 to 25500 ms.

• If the SR-750 Series fails to read a code within the one-shot trigger duration, it stops illumination and outputs a reading error.

• Other operations and precautions are the same as those for the level trigger.

The ON state of the trigger input is recognized after the input stays on for at least the specified input time constant. The OFF state of the trigger input is recognized after the input stays off for at least the specified input time constant. Consequently, when the line speed is fast and fast pulse signals are used as trigger input signals, be careful to make the ON/OFF time of the pulse signals longer than the specified input time constant.

Trigger input time constant = when a, if a becomes larger than b, the OFF state of the trigger input is not recognized. When a ≤ b, the ON/OFF state of the timing signal can be recognized.

OK/NG ERROR

• When a code is read successfully, the read operation stops.

• The TRG BUSY output continues until the trigger input turns off.

 Timing Chart for the one-shot trigger

When the specified one-shot trigger duration elapses, the read data and OK/NG/ ERROR signal are output.

OK/NG ERROR

• When a code is read successfully, the read operation stops.

• The TRG BUSY output continues until the one-shot trigger duration elapses.

E SR-750 UM

Page 28

4-4 Read Mode

Point

OK/NG ERROR

Trigger input

Code

Scanning + decoding

Data communication

TRG BUSY output

(When reading is successful) (When reading failed)

OK/NG/ERROR output

Trigger input

Code

Scanning + decoding

Data communication

TRG BUSY output

(When reading is successful) (When reading fail ed)

OK/NG/ERROR output

ERROR

Duplicate reading prevention interval

The SR-750 Series offers 4 types of read modes. Select the appropriate type for your application. For most applications, use "Single read mode". * For the sake of simplicity, Input time constant + Scan delay time is not shown in

the timing chart.

Single read mode

In this mode, the SR-750 Series reads a single code while the trigger input is turned on once, and then outputs data. Scanning will not begin again until the timing input is first turned off, then back on again.

 Timing Chart

* The above timing chart shows the case where "Level trigger" and "Send after

reading" are selected.

• In single read mode, the data transmission timing can be selected from "Send after reading" or "Send after timing off".

• The timing mode can be selected from "Level trigger" or "One-shot trigger".

• Scan interval is automatically set so that decoding processing can be implemented efficiently.

"4-1 Reading Operations (Page 26)"

Multiple Code Reading in Single Read Mode

Normally, the single read mode is used to read 1 code from 1 timing input signal. When the following read setting conditions are specified, multiple codes within the field of view can be read with 1 timing input signal.

 Setting "Multi read" in the code detail settings

When "Multi read" is selected in the code detail settings, multiple codes can be read in 1 reading operation.

• Use the AutoID Network Navigator or setting command to set.

• The number of codes for multiple readings can be set between 2 and 16

• When "Allow reduced detection count" is selected, the reading is considered successful if at least 1 code is read successfully.

Multi 1 Read Mode

In this mode, the SR-750 Series reads multiple codes in succession while the trigger input is turned on once. In Multi 1 read mode, the SR-750 Series sends out data and outputs an OK signal every time it reads 1 code (or an OK/NG signal when preset data is registered). The SR-750 continues to scan while the trigger input is on even if no code is present. ERROR will only be output if no code is read after the trigger signal is turned off.

 Timing Chart

• The SR-750 Series reads codes in succession for the following duration: Level trigger : While the trigger input is turned on One-shot trigger : During the specified one-shot trigger duration

• The duplicate reading prevention operation changes according to the setting of the duplicate reading prevention interval reset. "3-12 Duplicate reading prevention interval reset" (Page 24)

• When codes with the same contents are read in succession, adjust the moving speed so that the codes pass at intervals longer than the specified duplicate reading prevention interval (Setting range: 0 to 25500 ms). Codes with different contents can be read at shorter intervals.

• Each time scanning is performed in Multi 1 operation, the laser pointer lights up. The lighting period for the laser pointer is set on "Laser-aimer blinking duration (0 to 990 ms)" and the scanning is not performed during this period.

• The data transmission timing for Multi 1 is "Send after read" only.

• In Multi 1 operation, the availability of the image save function is as follows. Saving images

• Read OK/NG ...Cannot be used

• Error image .....Can be used

Point

When Multi 1 read mode is selected using the AutoID Network Navigator, the decode timeout is set to 500 ms. To shorten the decode timeout period, change the decode timeout setting of each parameter bank manually.

• In this setting, multiple codes of different types cannot be read in 1 read action.

• Codes are output in order starting from the code coordinates above the upper scan screen (if the height is the same, from the left).

• The output data format is as follows:

Header The 1st data , The 2nd data , ··· Terminator

E SR-750 UM

,= Inter delimiter: Can be changed with setting (Default = "," (0x2C))

Page 29

Multi 2 Read Mode

Point

OK/ NG

(1) (2) (4) (1) (2) (4) (2) (2)

ERROR

Trigger input

Scanning + decoding

Data communication

OK/NG/ERROR output

(When reading is successful) (When reading failed)

TRG BUSY output

Read error

Reading success

Parameter bank No.

Trigger input

Scanning

Decoding

OK/NG/ERR LED output

TRG BUSY output

Data communication

(1) (2) (3)

Decoding

failed

Decoding

failed

Decoding succeede

Decode timeout

Decoding time

Burst scan

No.

Burst scan

No.

Burst scan

No.

Multi 2 read mode is used to read the codes in the parameter banks with registered settings in order while the trigger input is turned on once. After reading all codes (max. 10 types) registered with the parameter bank, this function sends the read data in the order of parameter number and outputs OK/NG signals. If no code is read while the trigger input is turned on or if even one code set for a parameter bank is not read, the SR-750 Series sends a reading error and outputs an ERROR signal for the unread code in the parameter bank after the trigger input turns off.

 Timing Chart

Timing charts when registered with the parameter banks 1, 2 and 4 are as follows:

Burst Reading Mode

The burst reading mode is a function to repeat scan up to a maximum of 8 times in succession and perform decoding after the scanning is complete. When, for example, the line speed is fast and accurate positioning is difficult, this function ensures scanning without missing codes by repeating scans only for the period during which the target is expected to pass.

Point

• The alternate function cannot be used in Burst reading mode. Decoding is performed with the specified parameter number.

• In Burst reading mode, the No. of repeat read attempts setting is ignored.

 Timing Chart

The following is the timing chart when the Burst reading mode is used. (Burst scan count: 3)

No. of burst scans

• The SR-750 Series reads codes in succession for the following duration: Level trigger : While the trigger input is turned on One-shot trigger : During the specified one-shot trigger duration

• An OK signal is output when all of the codes of the set parameter banks are read.

• An ERROR signal is output when even 1 specified code could not be read.

• Even when there are multiple codes within the reading range, all codes can be read simultaneously.

• Each time scanning is performed in Multi 2 operation, the laser pointer lights up. The lighting period for the laser pointer is set on "Laser-Aim pulse duration (0 to 990 ms)" and the scanning is not performed during this period.

 Output data format

The following output data format is used for the read data.

Header

Read data in

parameter bank

No. 1

• Each read data is separated with "," (0x2C: Intermediate delimiter).

• The data for the read bar codes is saved in the send buffer of the SR-750 Series once and then is output when all configured banks have been read or the timing input is turned off. The size of the send buffer of the SR-750 Series is 10 KB.

• If reading fails for any of parameter banks 1 to 10 or if the specified code is not found, ERROR is sent as the read data of the corresponding parameter bank number.

Read data in

parameter bank

No. 2

,...,

parameter bank

Read data in

No. 10

Terminator

(1) (2)

(3)

Burst scan interval

(1) (2) (3)

(Failed) (Failed)

(Succeeded)

OK/NG

(2) (3)

(1)

Burst scan No.

(1) (2) (3)

(Failed) (Failed) (Failed)

ERROR

• In Burst reading mode, the scanned data is decoded in the order in which it was obtained. If decoding fails after the decode timeout period elapses, the decoding is shifted to the next scanned data.

• The data communication is output when the decoding is successful or decoding of all scan data is failed. The decoding time when decoding succeeds for the third scanned data is as follows:

• If the trigger input turns off with the decoding processing unfinished, reading error occurs. Secure longer time for the trigger input ON than the time calculated by (scan + burst scan interval + decoding timeout time) x burst scan count.

• The data transmission timing for the Burst reading mode is "Send after read" only.

E SR-750 UM

Page 30

5-1 Installing, Starting, and

disc JP

EN CHT CHS DE

manual

AutoIDLauncher.exe AutoIDLauncher.ini

JP EN CHT CHS DE

JP EN

SetupPrerequisites dotnetfx35.exe

setupNF.exe languagepack

AutoIDNetworkNavigator Multimonitor FileView

Setup

ﬁrmware

EDS

GSDML

Windowssampleprogram

Manual data in PDF format

SR-D100/750/650 Series main unit firmware

EDS file for EtherNet/IP

GSDML file for PROFINET

Sample program of Visual Basic, C# and C++

Important

• To install AutoID Network Navigator, log on as a user with rights to change the system configuration, such as Administrator or Computer Administrator.

• Quit all active applications before starting the installation. The installation may take longer if antivirus software or other applications are active on the computer.

Shutting Down

This section describes how to install AutoID Network Navigator as well as how to start and shut down the application.

PC Requirements

Before starting installation, confirm that your PC meets the following requirements:

 Supported OSs

• Windows XP (SP3 or higher) 32-bit version

• Windows Vista (Business/Ultimate, SP2 or higher) 32-bit version

• Windows 7 (Professional or higher) 32-bit version/64-bit version

• Windows 8 (Windows RT excluded) * NET Framework 3.5 SP1 or later must be installed in advance. * When installing .NET3.5 on Windows 8, the Internet environment is necessary. * When installing .NET3.5 on Windows 8, operate from the control panel.

 Hardware

32-bit 64-bit

Processor 2.0 GHz

System Memory 1 GB 2 GB

DVD-ROM Drive Required for installation

Communication Port Ethernet port

 Precautions

• To install AutoID Network Navigator, log on as a user with rights to change the system configuration, such as Administrator or Computer Administrator.

• Quit all active applications before starting the installation. The installation may take longer if antivirus software or other applications are active on the computer.

 Trademark

Windows 8/Windows 7/Vista/XP is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States.

 Installation Flow

1 Turn ON the PC and start Windows.

2 Insert the "AutoID Network Navigator Master Disc" into the DVD-

ROM drive of the PC.

3 Normally, the AutoRun function of the computer will display the

following screen. To start the installer directly, use Windows Explorer or another method to open the DVD-ROM drive, and double-click "AutoID Launcher.exe" in the Setup folder.

AutoID Launcher will start and select the language of the installer software.

4 The AutoID Network Navigator installer will start.

Install Method

This section explains installation using the following drive configuration under Windows 7 as an example: Drive C: Hard disk drive Drive E: DVD-ROM drive

 Folder Structure

The folder structure on the master disc is as follows.

E SR-750 UM

5 Click "Install .NET Framework 3.5 SP1".

If .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 is already installed in the computer to be used, then the install will automatically exit.

• If .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 is not installed, follow the on-screen instructions to continue with the installation.

6 Click "Install AutoID Network Navigator". 7 Click "Next".

8 Click "Next".

Click on the [Change] button to change to the folder in which the application will be installed.

Page 31

9 Click [Install].

Click [Finish].

Follow the same steps to "Install FileView" and "Install MultiMonitor".

 Uninstall Method

From the Start menu, select [Control panel] -> [Programs] -> [Programs and Features] -> [Uninstall or change a program], select the program to uninstall from the list, and click [Uninstall].

Startup Procedure

Starting AutoID Network Navigator

From the Start menu, select [Programs] → [KEYENCE Applications] → [AutoID] → [AutoID Network Navigator (EN)].

Or, double-click on the desktop. AutoID Network Navigator will start up.

Select the network card to use first.

FileView install screen

MultiMonitor install screen

 When automatically detected

If the SR-750 Series unit is within the same network, then this will be automatically detected, and the following window will be displayed.

 When not automatically detected

If the SR-750 Series unit is not automatically detected, then the following message will be displayed.

E SR-750 UM

Page 32

Adding Reader with Register Button

Important

To add the SR-750 Series on the different network, default gateway must have been preconfigured to the SR-750 Series.

• To set a temporary IP address, the SR-750 Series must be on the same network. Temporary IP address cannot set for a SR-750 Series on the different network.

• Temporary IP address setting is a function to communicate with AutoID Network Navigator. IP address and subnet mask etc. for the SR-750 Series must be set according to the network to use.

• The IP address set using the Temporary IP Address Settings is canceled when the main unit is reset. When the unit is being connected temporarily due to maintenance, etc., turn the power on again after the setting is complete, or perform the main unit reset by sending the RESET command.

When a temporary IP address has been set, the IP address is displayed in light blue .

If the SR-750 Series is on the different network, or it is placed on the network after starting AutoID Network Navigator up, add the reader by clicking the Register button.

1 Click the Register button .

2 If the SR-750 Series is on a different network, click the Add button

and enter the IP address of the SR-750 Series to add.

Adding Reader with Temporary IP Address Settings

Temporary IP address is used if the IP address for the SR-750 Series is unknown or the IP address of the SR-750 Series to register is conflicting within the network.

1 Click the Apply temporary IP address button.

2 Press the TUNE button of the SR-750 Series for 5 seconds until 4

multiple LEDs light up.

For button operation details, click here to display the button operation description window.

3 When the address is detected, the reader information is displayed as

follows:

3 To have a SR-750 Series unit participate on the network after starting

AutoID Network Navigator, click the [Auto Search] button and add the SR-750 Series unit.

To add all searched readers, check "Check all". To add only a certain reader, uncheck "Check all" and check the reader to add.

4 Click the [Register] button.

The SR-750 Series unit will be registered in the reader view, and will be usable by AutoID Network Navigator.

If the IP address shown is correct, click the OK button. To change the IP address, click the Change button to change the IP address.

To add all readers detected, check "Check all". To add only a certain reader, uncheck "Check all" and check the reader to add.

Important

E SR-750 UM

Page 33

5-2 Screen Layout

(7)(4)

(1)

(2) (3) (5)

(6)

(8)

Menu Bar

This section describes the icons for AutoID Network Navigator.

Screen

(1) : Menu Bar

Some operations of the AutoID Network Navigator functions or software version can be checked.

(2) : File Icon

…Creates a new file.

…Opens a file.

…Saves on an existing file.

(3) : Edit Icon

Undo the current work or redo.

(4) : Tool Icon

Starts each tool of AutoID Network Navigator. (For details of each tool, refer to

Page 51 or later.)

(5) : System icons

… Register button. Register

the SR-750 Series unit in AutoID Network Navigator.

… Change settings button.

Open a configuration file.

… Delete button. Delete a SR-

750 Series unit from AutoID Network Navigator.

… Update button. Update the

connection with the SR-750 Series unit to the latest status.

(6) : Reader list

Displays search results or reader information for the detected readers or an open file. Registration of a new reader or deletion of a displayed reader can also be performed.

(7) : Transmission and reception

settings icon Prints quick setup codes or sends/ receives a configuration.

(8) : Configuration View

While confirming SR-750 Series unit read images, carry out quick calibration or configure transmission settings or operations modes. (For details of the Configuration View operation, refer to Page

35.)

… Click to reset the configuration

to default.

 File

 Edit

 View

 System

 Transfer

• New : Creates a new configuration

• Open : Opens a configuration file.

• Save : Saves the selected file.

• Save As : Saves the selected file with a

• Save All : Saves all opened files.

• Quick Setup Code : Prints the settings of the

•

Export Reader Configuration

•

ave serial number : Not used with the SR-750

• Report Generator : Uses the report generator

• Undo : Goes back to a previous state.

• Redo : Performs an operation again.

• Reader View : If the checkmark is removed,

•

Highlight Configured Fields

• Register : Registers a reader. For details,

•

witch reader configuration

• Delete Reader : Deletes a registered reader

•

Temporary IP Address Setting

•C

onfirm Firmware Version

• Update Firmware : Updates the system firmware.

•

Retrieve Configuration

• Send Configuration : Sends a configuration.

file.

new name.

selected file with the quick setup code function. For details, refer to Page 50.

: Outputs the selected file list to

a tab separated text file. For details, refer to Page 54.

Series.

function. For details, refer to

"5-14 Report Generator

Function (Page 55)".

then the reader list will close.

: Highlights the parts changed

from the factory configuration.

refer to Page 32.

: Switches to the other

configuration file.

from a list.

: Assigns a temporary IP

address.

: Display the IP address, unit

system version, and MAC address of the selected reader.

: Receives a configuration.

 Tool

• Live View : Starts the LiveView function. For

• Image View : Starts the ImageView function. For

• FileView : Starts the FileView function. For

• Terminal : Starts the Terminal function. For

•

Installation Guide

details, refer to Page 51.

details, refer to Page 52.

details, refer to Page 53.

details, refer to Page 50.

: Starts the Installation Guide. For

details, refer to Page 53.

E SR-750 UM

Page 34

 Configuration

Search Readers on Application Startup

Terminal on Live View Startup

Select a reader to configure from the automatically searched readers. Or register the reader to configure.

Configure the operation of the SR-750 Series

Page 34

Send the configuration to the SR-750 Series

Page 49

Perform a reading test

Page 35

Save/print the configuration as necessary

Page 49, 54

Shut down AutoID Network Navigator

•

• Option window

Select Network Card

• Options : Click to open the Option

•

Clock Sync (SR-D100)

•

Communication Timeout

• : Select to display the terminal

: Selects a network card for the

PC to use with AutoID Network Navigator.

window.

: Sets whether to search

automatically a SR-750 Series at the AutoID Network Navigator startup.

: Not used with the SR-750

Series.

: Sets the communication

timeout for AutoID Network Navigator to either 5 or 10 seconds.

together when Live View is started.

 Help

•

About : Displays the version information of AutoID

Network Navigator.

The Reader List

AutoID Network Navigator communicates with the connected SR-750 Series unit at specified intervals. The indicator displayed to the left shows the status of communications.

Lamp status Description

Green SR-750 is registered in AutoID Network Navigator.

SR-750 is operating in AutoID Network Navigator. * During operation, this will halt the command port

Blue

connection and data port connection with other communication devices.

AutoID Network Navigator and SR-750 are not

Gray

communicating.

An SR-750 formerly in communication can not be recognized. Check that the IP address has not changed, or that

Red

the Ethernet cable has not been removed. When communication is possible, the indicator will automatically change to green.

 Operations that can be carried out on the reader list

The following operations can be carried out on the reader list.

• Click the indicator to change the status of communications between AutoID Network Navigator and the SR-750 Series unit.

• When the mouse pointer is placed on any of the reader name, IP address, or model, then the MAC address of that SR-750 Series unit will be displayed.

• Right-clicking on any of the reader name, IP address, or model will enable selection of registration, deletion, or changing of configuration of the reader.

• These details can be selected from System in the menu bar.

5-3 AutoID Network Navigator

Operation Flow

The basic operation flow of AutoID Network Navigator is as follows:

5-4 Details of Settings View

This section describes details and operating methods in settings view for AutoID Network Navigator.

[Camera] tab

The [Camera] tab has [Auto] and [Manual] methods for registering with the parameter bank.

• Auto : Mode for carrying out quick calibration of the SR-750 Series unit.

Click Positioning → Tuning → Test to automatically configure the optimum settings.

• Manual : Enables quick configuration of details of reading settings that cannot be configured in quick tuning.

This section explains details of this screen.

• Double-click the IP address to specify the IP address of the connected reader.

• Used to change the SR-750 communicating with AutoID Network Navigator.

E SR-750 UM

Page 35

The [Auto] screen

(5)

(1)

(6)

(7)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(8) (9)

(1) (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

In the standard condition, the switch side of the SR-750 Series faces to the top.

Top

Bottom

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(1) Configuration procedure

Buttons to switch between [Auto] and [Manual] modes.

(2) Positioning

Laser-Aim … Activate the laser-Aim of the SR-750 Series. Monitor … Displays the image output by the SR-750 Series.

Automatically measures reading rate at the same time.

Monitor Settings…Sets the display during monitor operation.

(3) Tuning

Tuning…Performs a calibration.

Tuning option … Sets the calibration method.

Tuning History… Displays the history of calibrations.

(4) Test

Reading test…Starts the reading rate test mode. Tact test … Starts the read time test mode. Bank … Check to start the test mode using a bank selected at (8).

If not checked, the test mode is started with the Alternate function activated.

(5) Monitor screen

Displays the image output by the SR-750 Series. Dragging on the screen or operating the orange guide can restrict the tuning range. The position of the restricted tuning range can be changes by further dragging.

Monitor Settings

 Camera settings

(1) : Brightness adjustment mode High quality mode…Adjusts the monitor

screen brightness with easiness to view codes prioritized.

High speed mode…Adjusts the monitor

screen brightness with the (2) setting prioritized.

(2) : Exposure on high speed mode

Upper limit of exposure when capturing images

(3) : Offset

Sets the offset value (brightness base value). Do not change normally.

(4) : Dynamic range

Sets the dynamic range when capturing images. Setting range: Hi-Sensitivity/Hi-SNR, Hi-DR

 Monitor Settings

(5) : Internal Lighting

Selects whether to use lighting of the SR-750 Series main unit.

(6) : External Lighting

Selects when using the external lighting. To interlock operation of the SR-750 Series with emission of external lighting, assign "EXT.LIGHT" to the output terminal.

(7) : Displayed image

Selects the displayed image from images before filter-processed or images after filter-processed.

(8) : Rotate image

Images output from the SR-750 Series can be rotated 180 degrees. The direction for easy adjustment can be selected according to the mounting condition of the SR-750 Series.

TEST TUNE

SR-625

NETIN

POWERR

OK/NG/

STB

* Clicking the (7) "Full area" button can reset the restricted tuning range.

(6) Brightness adjustment bar

Adjust the brightness of the monitor screen.

(7) [Full area] button

Resets the decoding area restricted on the monitor, and returns the decoding area to the full field of view.

(8) Parameter bank display window

Displays the current parameter bank settings.

(9) Camera status display window

Displays quick tuning status and test mode result values.

Tuning Options

Tuning tab

 Camera settings

(1) : Camera settings

Same as for the monitor settings

 Tuning Options

(2) : Tuning method

Normal........ Performs tuning without

Filter ........... Performs tuning with image

(3) : Multi read

The multi read mode reads multiple codes of the same type with one parameter bank. Multi read ... Check to enable multi read.

Allow reduced detection count…

(4) : Rotate image

Disable .......Searches black codes with white background.

Able ............ Searches white codes with black background.

Auto............ Searches automatically detecting the color (black/white) of code

image process filter.

process filter.

Set the number of codes to be read from 2 to 16.

Check this to approve reading success even if the number of codes read is less than the set number.

and background.

E SR-750 UM

Page 36

Symbology tab

(1)

(2)

 Code setting

(5) : Symbology

Specify the code type for tuning.

(6) : Code-specific setting

Set the read length and detailed conditions of each code. For read length and detailed conditions, refer to [Code] tab (Page 38).

(5) (6)

 Parameter Bank Display Window

• Alternate … Displays whether to use the alternate function.

• Code type … Code type to perform reading. 1 code type for each bank is

• Exposure (μs) … Sets the exposure time to scan an image.

• Gain … Amplifies the brightness of the scanned data.

• Dynamic range … Displays the dynamic range for scanning.

• Filter … Displays the filter type for scanning.

• Filter count … Displays the number of filtering times.

When Alternate is set to "Disable", the corresponding parameter bank will not be used.

displayed.

 Reading State Window (During Calibration)

(1) : Level

Displays the matching level.

(2) : Brightness

Divided in 128 comprehensive image brightness phases according to the factors such as dynamic range, gain and exposure.

• Plot colors, when filtering function is activated

Color Filter name Color code (RGB)

●: Black Disable 0,0,0

●: Yellow-green Equalize 68,192,0

●: Green Expand 0,130,58

●: Light blue Shrink 0,183,238

●: Blue Open 0,67,238

●: Purple Close 171,0,242

●: Orange Unsharp Mask 255,138,0

Details of the Tuning History screen

Click button to display the following screen. It is possible to select what is considered the optimal calibration results when carrying out multiple calibrations for the same code, and register these in the parameter bank.

•History

Displays a maximum of 8 results of calibration. The latest calibration results are displayed at the top in position (1). Multiple history data results can be combined and displayed on a calibration results chart.

•Update

A button to reflect the calibration results selected in the history in the parameter bank selected in the reading settings.

•Clear

Deletes all collected calibration history.

• Reading settings

Use the bank update button to select the parameter bank No. to update. You can also confirm detailed values for updated calibration results.

• Tuning image

Displays image obtained at calibration, when selected in the history.

• Tuning result

Displays graphs from calibration, when selected in the history.

The [Manual] screen

Click the [Manual] button to list items that can be configured in the SR-750 Series parameter bank. Use this to check result values obtained in the [Auto] screen, and to manually change parameters.

 Reading State Window (Reading Rate)

• Parameter bank … Displays the bank number used for reading.

• Reading test … Displays a reading rate.

• Matching level … Displays a matching level.

• Read Data … Displays data when the reading was successful.

 Reading State Window (Tact Test)

• Bank number … Displays the bank number

used for reading.

• Read time … Displays the latest read

time.

• Max time … Displays the maximum

read time.

• Min time … Displays the minimum read

time.

• Read Data … Displays data when the

reading was successful.

E SR-750 UM

Page 37

 Common

•Alternate

Enable: read the selected parameter bank, and use for reading operations. Disable: do not use the selected parameter bank.

• Repeat read attempts

Set the number of repeat reads for the selected parameter bank within the range of 0 to 32. * This specifies the number of retries, therefore if "02" is set, then after a single

read, 2 retries will be carried out.

• Decode timeout (×10 ms)

The timeout value set in auto calibration. Set values can be specified manually from 10 ms to 10000 ms (Unit: 10 ms).

•Shutter delay

Set the delay between the recognition of a trigger input and the scanning start. Default : 0 ms Setting range : 0 to 255 ms

• Decode range

Set the range of scanning and decoding.

• Inverse read

Inverse read settings during calibration.

• Reverse read

Reverse read (reverse surface) settings during calibration.

• Base tilt angle

Sets the base angle for a tilt angle range to limit reading. When DataMatrix is set, the finder pattern rotates until it appears as an "L". When the QR code is set, the corner without a finder pattern will become the bottom right corner and 0 degrees. The angle rotates in the clockwise direction (anticlockwise for Reverse read). Default : 0 degrees Setting range : 0 to 359 degrees

•Tilt angle range

Sets a tilt angle range to limit reading. Specify with ±* degree to the base tilt angle. Default : 180 degree Setting range : 0 to 180 degree

 Code

• Code type

Code type set in the parameter bank.

• Code setting

Maximum and minimum values for read digits in the parameter bank.

• Code detail setting

Confirm and change detailed settings for each code item set in the parameter bank. Additionally, multiple read conditions can be set here.

• Output length limitation

Set the output length limitation function. Default: if enabled, then set the following items.

• Mode

Set the direction of the range of the output length limitation function. Forward : set the effective digits and start digits for restrictions from the front of

the code data.

Backward : set the effective digits and start digits for restrictions from the end of

the code data.

• Start of output

Set the number of digits for output length limitation.

• Starting index of output

Set the number of digits for the start of output limiting within the code data.

* This item can also be set from the [Code] tab.

 Light

• Use internal lighting

Set whether or not to use internal lighting. Default: Enable

• Use external lighting

Set whether or not to use external lighting. Default: Disable

 Scan

• Exposure

The exposure set in auto calibration. This can also be set manually from the drop-down menu.

•Gain

The digital magnification ratio for brightness of the scan data set in auto calibration. Default: 10000 This can also be set manually from the drop-down menu.

• Offset

The offset value for the scan data set in auto calibration. Gain processing is performed based upon the value set as the offset. Do not change the setting value under normal conditions.

• Dynamic range

The dynamic range set in auto calibration. Default : High sensitive Setting contents: Hi-Sensitive, Hi-SNR, Hi-DR

• Sensitivity

The analog magnification ratio for brightness of the scan data set in auto calibration. Default: 10000 This can also be set manually from the drop-down menu.

 Filter

• First manual filter

Sets the filter to perform for the scanned data. Default : Disable Setting range : Disable, Equalize, Expand, Shrink, Open, Close, Median, or

• First manual filter count

Sets the repeat times to perform the first filtering operation specified. Default : 1 Setting range : 1 to 7

• Second to Fourth manual filters…Same as First manual filter.

• Second to Fourth manual filter counts…Same as First manual filter count.

Unsharp Mask

 Algorithm

• Grid correction

Sets to either Enable or Disable for the grid correction. Default : Disable Setting range : Enable or Disable

To copy or paste a parameter bank, right click on the bank number and

Reference

then perform copy or paste operation for the target parameter. Screen image

E SR-750 UM

Page 38

[Code] tab

Reference

(1)

(2)

(4)

(3)

KEYENCE–SR–75 0

YENCE

Forward

Origin: 3

Length: 5

∴Output data:

KEYENCE–SR–75 0

–SR–7

Backward

Origin: 3

Length: 5

∴Output data:

DataMatrix QR

.....Check this to send read

data, including the start/ stop character (*), to the host computer.

.....When this option is

checked, [Send checkdigit] is enabled.

Send check-digit............... Check this to send read

data, including the check digit, to the host computer.

Quiet zone scale factor (4-11)

....Set the quiet zone scale

factor.

Full ASCII conversion....... Recognizes CODE39 as

"CODE39 FullAscii" and output.

Send start/stop characters (*)

Inspect check-digit [Modulus 43]

In the [Code] tab, set read digits for symbology registered in each parameter bank, as well as detailed items and output length restrictions for each code. Furthermore, settings items in the [Code] tab set the same items as those in the [Camera] tab, Manual section. Change settings in one of these.

(1) Bank bb Coded Settings

Symbology set in the parameter bank number (1 to 10). Displays the symbology set in auto calibration. Additionally, for each symbology set here, maximum values for read digits are changed, as well as detailed items using the [Details] button. Symbology that can be set in parameter banks are as follows.

1: QR 7: ITF 2: DataMatrix 9: NW-7 (Codabar) 5: GS1 DataBar (RSS) 10: JAN/EAN/UPC 6: CODE39 11: CODE128

(2) Number of digits read

Set maximum and minimum values for digits read. Click the [Edit] button to change the maximum and minimum values. The maximum and minimum values can be set to the same values, and the number of read digits restricted. Permissible setting ranges for each symbology are as follows.

Symbology Maximum value Minimum value

QR 7089 1

DataMatrix 3116 1

GS1 DataBar (RSS) 77 1

CODE39, NW-7 50 3

ITF 50 2

CODE128 128 1

Depending on the marking conditions or operation environment, cancellation of significant digits of NW-7 (Codabar) codes may occur or the code may be mistakenly read. It is recommended to restrict the read length.

(3) Details

Click the [Details] button and set particular conditions for each code. Additionally, set multiple read conditions.

(4) Output length option

Perform output length limitation settings.

• Length limitation settings method

The following are example settings when output is restricted in "KEYENCE-SR750" data.

(1) Limit Output: Forward, Origin: 3, Length: 5

(2) Limit Output: Backward, Origin: 3, Length: 5

* If output is set to "Backward", then because this only designates the count

direction of the star digit, the digits before and after the output data is not changed.

Detailed settings

Items that can be set using the details button differ depending on the code. This section explains detailed setting items for each symbology.

 Multi read settings

Applying multi read settings enables reading of multiple codes within the same decoding area using one scan.

• Set the number of codes that can be read in one read In multi read from 2 to 16.

• By selecting "Allow reduced detection count", to output an OK signal even if a single read is successful.

• Output formats for multi read data are as follows.

Header 1st data item , 2nd data item , … , nth data item Terminator

, : Intermediate delimiter. This can be changed to within 5 characters (Default =, (0x2Ch))

• The order of output data is from the code with center coordinates closest to the top of the scan screen (if the same height, then from the right).

 2D code detail settings

Screens and setting items differ for each code.

E SR-750 UM

 Detailed setting for CODE39

Page 39

 Detailed setting for ITF

Modulus 10/Weight 3 ....... When this option is

checked, [Send checkdigit] is enabled.

Send check-digit .............. Check this to send read

data, including the check digit, to the host computer.

Quiet zone scale factor (4-11)

... Set the quiet zone scale

factor.

Send start/stop characters

...Select the Start/Stop

Characters.

Validate check-digit ..........When this option is

checked, [Check-digit algorithm] and [Send check-digit] are enabled.

Check-digit algorithm........Select the method used

for the check digit calculation.

Send check-digit............... Check this to send read

data, including the check digit, to the host computer.

Quiet zone scale factor (4-11)

....Set the quiet zone scale

factor.

Add '0' as system code UPC-E

Ignore UPC without supplemental

GS1-128 (UCC/EAN-128)

...Check this to support

GS1-128 (UCC/EAN-128). The SR-750 Series outputs "FNC1," which displays the variable length separator via [GS] (0x1D).

Quiet zone scale factor (4-11)

....Set the quiet zone scale

factor.

GS1 DataBar Truncated... Check this to allow

reading of GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional/GS1 DataBar Truncated.

..... Check this to allow

reading of GS1 DataBar Stacked/GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional.

GS1 DataBar Limited ....... Check this to allow

reading of GS1 DataBar Limited.

GS1 DataBar Expanded... Check this to allow

reading of GS1 DataBar Expanded.

..... Check this to allow

reading of GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked.

.....Set the GS1 DataBar

Expanded Stacked (Number of rows).

.....Set the quiet zone scale

factor.

GS1 DataBar Stacked (Omnidirectional)

GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked

GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked (Number of rows) (2-11)

Limited right space scaling factor (0-11)

 Detailed setting for NW-7 (Codabar)

 Detailed setting for GS1 DataBar

Communication1

This section explains how to set the communication configuration for the SR-750 Series. Same configuration can be set in the Table tab.

 Detailed setting for JAN/EAN/UPC

EAN/JAN-13..........................Check this to allow reading of EAN/JAN 13 digits.

EAN/JAN-8............................Check this to allow reading of EAN/JAN 8 digits.

UPC-E...................................Check this to allow reading of UPC-E.

UPC-A output........................When reading UPC-A, select whether to output the

2-digit supplemental..............Check this to read 2-digit supplemental characters.

5-digit supplemental..............Check this to read 5-digit supplemental characters.

GTIN 14 digits output ...........Add a "0" to the head of the data and output as 14

Quiet zone scale factor (4-11)

data as 12 or 13 digits.

.........Check this to append a "0" to the head of read data.

.........Check this to allow reading of the UPC code with

supplemental characters only.

digits.

....Set the quiet zone scale factor.

 Detailed setting for CODE128

(1)

(2)

(1) : RS-232C communication condition settings

Set these according to the external device to connect.

• Baud Rate

Select 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps. Default: 115200 bps

• Data Bits

Select the data length of either 7 or 8 bits. Default: 8 bits

•Parity

Select None, Even, or Odd. Default: Even

•Stop Bit

Select 1 or 2 bits. Default: 1 bit

•Protocol

Select None, PASS/RTRY, or ACK/NAK for the communication protocol. Default: None

(2) : Ethernet communication condition settings

Set these according to the network to connect.

• IP address

Set the IP address for the SR-750 Series. Default: 192.168.100.100

• Subnet Mask

Set the subnet mask for the SR-750 Series. Default: 255.255.255.0

• Default Gateway

Set the default gateway for the SR-750 Series. Default: 0.0.0.0

E SR-750 UM

Page 40

[Communication2] tab

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

Important

Set communications in line with the control host that connects the SR-750 Series unit. These can be set or changedin the [Table] tab.

(1) : Command port

Select the interface to perform command communication. Commands indicate operation and configuration commands. Default : RS-232C Setting range : Not used, RS-232C or Ethernet

* If the Data port 2 interface is RS-232C, RS-232C cannot be

selected for the command communication.

* When Ethernet is selected, set the port number to receive

the SR-750 Series commands. Port default: 9004

(2) : Data port 1

Select the interface to output the read data. Default : RS-232C Setting range : Not used, RS-232C or Ethernet

* If the Data port 2 interface is RS-232C, RS-232C cannot be

selected for Data port 1.

* When Ethernet is selected, set the port number to receive

the SR-750 Series commands. Port default: 9004

* When Ethernet is selected and the SR-750 is set as a

client, click the "Connected device settings" button to enter the IP address and port number of the destination to send the read data.

(3) : Data port 2

Select the interface and protocol to output the read data to a PLC.

• Interface

Default : Not used Setting range : Not used, RS-232C or Ethernet

* When Ethernet is selected, enter the IP address and port

number of the destination to send the read data.

•Protocol

Default : MC protocol Setting range : MC protocol, SYSWAY (only when RS-232C is selected),

KV STUDIO, Ethernet/IP (only when Ethernet is selected), PROFINET (only when Ethernet is selected) or All-purpose (No procedure/TCP)

• Memory layout

When the protocol is MC protocol, SYSWAY, or KV STUDIO, set the memory layout.

• DM front address Default : 0 Setting range : Page 82

• Control region address Default : 0 Setting range : Page 82

• Response region address Default : 0 Setting range : Page 82

• Ethernet/IP settings Set Ethernet/IP.

• PROFINET settings: Details Set PROFINET.

EtherNet/IP and PROFINET communication cannot be used in combination with the Master/Slave function. If the Master/Slave function has already been selected, the following message will appear. When setting EtherNet/IP and PROFINET communication, set the Master/Slave function to "Not used".

(4) : Format

• Header/Terminator

Sets the header and terminator of the read data.

• Header Default : None Setting range : Select None, STX, ESC, or Config.

When Config is selected, enter the header using 5 or less ASCII or hexadecimal characters as desired.

• Terminator Default : CR Setting range : CR, CR+LF, ETX, or Config.

When Config is selected, enter the header using 5 or less ASCII or hexadecimal characters as desired.

• Partition mark

The selected character is used as a separator in send data. Select any single ASCII or hexadecimal character. Default : ":" (3Ah)

• Inter delimiter

The selected character is used as a separator for appended data. Select any single ASCII or hexadecimal character. Default : "," (2Ch)

E SR-750 UM

Page 41

[Operation] tab

Important

(1) (3)

(2)

(4)

(5)

(3)

(5)

(6)

(4)

(1)

(2)

Configures SR-750 Series operation. These can be set or changed in the [Table] tab.

(1) Reading Mode

Select one of the following four choices.

• Single ........... single label read mode

• Multi1 ............ multi-label read mode 1

• Multi2 ............ multi-label read mode 2

• Burst read .... burst reading mode

When Multi1 or Multi2 is selected, the following window is displayed. Set LaserAim Pulse Duration.

(2) Data Transmission

When specifying single label read mode or multi-label read mode 2, select from the following 2 options.

• Send after read

• Send after timing off

(3) Duplicate Reading Prevention Interval

Set when multi-label read mode 1 is specified.

Default : 1000 ms Setting range : 0 to 25500 ms (Specify in units of 100 ms)

When Multi1 is selected, the following window is displayed. Set Duplicate Reading Prevent Interval Reset.

"3-12 Duplicate reading prevention interval reset (Page 24)"

Burst read settings Specify burst read mode and the follow screen will be displayed.

Master/Slave

(1) : Operation setting

Sets the Master/Slave function operation.

• Default : Not used

• Setting range : Not used, Multi Drop, Multi Head

(2) : Group name

Determines the group name to use the Master/Slave function.

• Default : GROUP01

• Setting range : Up to 16 characters Set with ASCII.

(3) : Unit ID

Sets ID as Master unit or Slave unit.

• Default : Check "Use as Master"

• Setting range : "Use as Master" or Slave ID "1 to 31"

(4) : Multi Head

Sets the number of read data when using the Multi Head.

• Default : 1

• Setting range : 1 to 8

(5) : Append Information

Sets to append group names or Master/Slave ID when using the Master/ Slave function.

• Default : None

(6) : Master/Slave Reader View

Displays the information of the reader that uses the Master/Slave function among readers that have been registered to AutoID Network Navigator.

Code quality verification

• Burst Interval Default : 0 ms Setting range : 0 to 255 ms (Specify in units of 1 ms)

• Burst Bank

Default : Bank1 Setting range : Bank1 to Bank10

•Burst Count

Default : 3 Setting range : 1 to 8

(4) Timing Mode

Select one of the following two choices.

• Level trigger

• One-shot trigger

If one-shot trigger is selected, then set the one-shot duration. Default : 1000 ms Setting range : 100 to 25500 ms (Specify in units of 10 ms)

(5) Timing On Command, Timing Off Command, Read Error String

Specify up to 8 ASCII or hexadecimal characters.

Timing On Command default : LON (4C4F4E) Timing Off Command default : LOFF (4C4F4646) Read Error String default : ERROR (4552524F52)

(1)

(2)

(1) Matching Level Judgment

Sets the Matching Level Judgment function. Default : Disable Changing the setting to "Enable" will enable the setting items for threshold or appending matching level.

(2) Code quality verification

Sets the Code quality verification function. Check the code quality verification standard. With the checked standard, set the threshold for the verified result or additional data of grade. Additional data setting for detailed items of verified results can also be made.

E SR-750 UM

Page 42

Edit data

(1)

(2)

(3)

(1)

(2)

(4)

(3)

(5)

NOTICE

• External lighting output polarity Default : Norm. open Setting range : Norm. open (normally

open) or Norm. close (normally closed)

(2)

(4)

(3)

(1)

(1) Additional Information

Checking the checkbox of data to add can set the Additional Information. Default : None for all items

(2) Read Data Format

Displays the position of added data when the Additional Information is set.

(3) Edit Data

Check "Use script" when using the edit data function.

[I/O] tab

Set operations for input/output terminals. These can be set or changed in the [Table] tab.

 Output terminal

Set the functions of the output terminals (OUT1, OUT2, OUT3). (4) OUT1, OUT2, OUT3 terminal functions

• Terminal function

OUT1 default : OK OUT2 default : NG+ERROR OUT3 default : TRG BUSY, LOCK BUSY, MODE BUSY, ERR BUSY Setting range : OK, NG, ERROR, STABLE, UNSTABLE, PRESET OK,

TUNING OK, TRG BUSY, LOCK BUSY, MODE BUSY, ERR BUSY EXT. LIGHT

You cannot set the result outputs (OK, NG, ERROR, PRESET OK, TUNING OK), and the operation outputs (TRG BUSY, LOCK BUSY, MODE BUSY, ERR BUSY) to the same output terminal.

• EXT. LIGHT Select to use external lighting. Select this to make the [EXT. LIGHT] button active.

(5) • Output Duration

Specify the polarity of the output terminal. (Common between terminals) Default : 500 ms Setting range : 0 to 2550 ms (Specify in units of 10 ms)

• TRG BUSY at Power-On

Specify start-up options when TRG BUSY is set. Default : Disable Setting range : Disable, Enable

 Input Terminal

Set the operation of the input terminals (IN1 and IN2). (1) Input Polarity

Specify the polarity of the input terminal.

Default : Norm. open Setting range : Norm. open (normally open) or Norm. close (normally closed)

(2) Required Input Duration

Set the time delay before the input terminal turns on.

Default : 1 ms Setting range : 1 ms, 2 ms, 10 ms

(3) IN1, IN2 Function

• Function

IN1 default : TIMING IN2 default : PRESET Settings range : TIMING, Preset Input, TEST, Clear PLC link error, TUNING,

Disable

• Test mode

When you select "TEST", specify the test mode desired. Settings range : reading rate test, processing time test, position test

• Power-ON trigger

Select this to activate IN1 and IN2 specified at power-on.

Refer to "3-6 Multi-I/O Function (Page 14)"

[Saving Images] tab

Set functions for saving images. These can be set or changed in the [Table] tab.

 Image saving function settings

Set image saving functions and modes. (1) Saving images operations

Default OK Image : Disable

NG Image : Disable Error Image : Save to RAM Unstable image : Disable Captured Image : Save to RAM

Setting range OK Image/NG Image/Unstable image

: Disable, Send by FTP

Error Image : Disable, Save to RAM, Save to ROM,

Send by FTP

Captured Image : Save to ROM, Send by FTP If burst read mode is set as the operating mode, specify the burst number for the target images.

E SR-750 UM

Page 43

(2) • Image save mode

Default : Save final bank image Setting range : Save final bank image, save specified number of images

from timing ON, save specified number of images before timing OFF

• Number of images saved

If the number of images to save has been specified from timing ON/OFF, then specify this number. Default : 10 Setting range : 1 to 10

 FTP Settings

Set if Send by FTP is selected in saving images, and the SR-750 Series device is operating as a client. (3) • IP Address

Set the IP address of the connection destination FTP server. Default : 0.0.0.0 Setting range : 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

• User Account/Password

Set the user account name and password of the destination FTP server. Default : User Account: admin

Password: admin

Setting range : Specify up to 16 ASCII or hexadecimal characters

• Passive mode

Default : Disabled (no check mark) Setting range : Disable, Enable

• Format

Default : JPEG Setting range : Bitmap, JPEG

• Quality (JPEG)

Set this when JPEG is selected as the format setting. Default : 5 Setting range : 1 to 10

•Binning

Default : 1/4 skipping Setting range : No binning, 1/4 skipping, 1/16 skipping, 1/64 skipping

(4) Edit image file name

When setting the edit image file name function, check "Use script". * Valid only in FTP transmission

[Table] tab

On the list of this tab, you can set items that can be set in [Communication1], [Communication2], [Operation], [I/O] and [Saving images] tabs. Defaults and settings ranges are the same as those in each respective tabs.

(1)

Some functions can only be configured on the [Table] tab. (1) Search box

Search whether the input words are present in the Table.

Communication1

 RS-232C

• Baud rate

Sets the baud rate. Default : 115200 bps Setting range : 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps

• Data length

Sets the data bit length. Default : 8 bits Setting range : 7 or 8 bits

•Parity

Sets the parity. Default : Even Setting range : None, Even, or Odd

• Stop bit

Sets the stop bit length. Default : 1 bit Setting range : 1 or 2 bits

•Protocol

Sets the output protocol for RS-232C read data. Default : None Setting range : None, PASS/RTRY, or ACK/NAK

 Ethernet

• IP address

Sets the IP address. Default : 192.168.100.100

• Subnet Mask

Sets the subnet mask. Default : 24 (255.255.255.0) Setting range : 8 to 30 (255.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.252)

• Default Gateway

Sets the default gateway. Default : 0.0.0.0

Communication2

 Command port

• Interface

Select the interface to perform command communication. Default : RS-232C Setting range : Not used, RS-232C, Ethernet

• Port (Waiting)

Sets the port number to perform command communication. *Only when the interface is set to Ethernet Default : 9004 Setting range : 1024 to 65535

* 9013, 9014, 9015, 9016, 5900, 5910, and 44818 cannot be

used as they are reserved for the main unit system.

• Keep Alive

Sets the keep-alive function for command communication. *Only when the interface is set to Ethernet Default : Enable Setting range : Enable or Disable

 Data port 1

• Interface

Sets the interface to perform PC host output. Default : RS-232C Setting range : Not used, RS-232C, Ethernet

• Remote IP address

Sets the IP address of the PC host. *Only when the interface is set to Ethernet Default : 0.0.0.0 * When 0.0.0.0 is set, the SR-750 performs server

operations only.

Setting range : 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

• Remote port

Sets the port number of the PC host. *Only when the interface is set to Ethernet Default : 9004 Setting range : 1024 to 65535

E SR-750 UM

Page 44

• Connection request

Important

Device name rule

1. PROFINET device name length: 1 to 240 characters

2. 1 label length: 1 to 63 characters

3. Only [a to z] (alphabet lower case), [0 to 9] (numbers), [-] (hyphen), [.] (period) can be used for a device name.

4. [-] (hyphen) cannot be used at the beginning of the label.

5. [-] (hyphen) cannot be used at the end of the label.

6. port-xyz, port-xyz-abcde cannot be the name of the first label. a, b, c, d, e, x, y, z means [0 to 9] (numbers).

7. Device names cannot be made in the IP address format (n.n.n.n n=0,…,999).

8. Labels cannot start with xn-.

9. The first character of labels cannot be a number.

Sets whether the reader sends connection requests for PC host output. *Only when the interface is set to Ethernet Default : Disabled Setting range : Disable or Enable

• Port (Waiting)

Sets the port number for PC host output of the SR-750 Series. *Only when the interface is set to Ethernet Default : 9004 Setting range : 1024 to 655355

•Keep Alive

Sets the keep-alive function of PC host output. *Only when the interface is set to Ethernet Default : Enable Setting range : Enable or Disable

* 9013, 9014, 9015, 9016, 5900, 5910, and 44818 cannot be

used as they are reserved for the main unit system.

 Data port 2

•Interface

Sets the interface to perform PLC communication. Default : Not used Setting range : Not used, RS-232C, Ethernet

• Remote IP address

Sets the IP address of the remote PLC. *Only when the interface is set to Ethernet Default : 0.0.0.0 Setting range : 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.25

• Remote port

Sets the port number of the remote PLC. *Only when the interface is set to Ethernet Default : 5000 Setting range : 1024 to 65535

 PLC link

•Protocol

Sets the PLC communication protocol. Default : MC protocol Setting range : MC protocol, SYSWAY (*RS-232C only), KV STUDIO, None (*RS-

• DM front address

Sets the DM front address when a PLC link is used. Default : 0 Setting range : MC protocol …0 to 32767

• Control region address

Sets the control region address when a PLC link is used. Default : 0 Setting range : MC protocol …0 to 7F

• Response region address

Sets the response region address when a PLC link is used. Default : 0 Setting range : MC protocol …0 to 7F

• PLC link timing input

Sets to enable timing input by PLC link. Default : Disabled Setting range : Disable or Enable

• Output length

Sets the data write length by PLC link. Default : 64 digits Setting range : 1 to 100 digits

• Timing/Data wait (x 100 ms)

Sets the communication interval of reading or writing to a PLC via PLC link. Default : 100 ms Setting range : 0 to 9900 ms (in units of 100 ms)

• Retry duration

Sets the interval to reconnect when PLC link communication is disabled. Default : 5 seconds Setting range : 1 to 30 seconds

E SR-750 UM

232C only), TCP (*Ethernet only), EtherNet/IP (*Ethernet only) or PROFINET (only when Ethernet is selected)

SYSWAY …0 to 9999 KV STUDIO …0 to 65534

SYSWAY …0 to 6143 KV STUDIO …1 to 599

 EtherNet/IP

• Data handshake

Sets EtherNet/IP data handshake Default : Disable Setting range : Disable or Enable

• Input assembly data size (send)

Sets EtherNet/IP Input assembly (send) size within the range from 40 to 1400. Default : 500 Setting range : 40 to 1400

• Output assembly data size (receive)

Sets EtherNet/IP Output assembly (receive) size within the range from 4 to 1400. Default : 500 Setting range : 4 to 1400

• Byte swapping

Sets EtherNet/IP Byte swap for the data area Default : Disable Setting range : Disable or Enable

 PROFINET

• Device name

Sets the device name used for PROFINET. Default: sr-750

• Data handshake

Sets the data handshake. Default : Disable Setting range : Disable or Enable

 Format

• Header

Sets the header. Default : Not selected Setting range : Enter the header using 5 or less ASCII or hexadecimal

characters as desired.

• Terminator

Sets the terminator. Default : 0D (hexadecimal display, ASCII characters [CR]) Setting range : Enter the header using 5 or less ASCII or hexadecimal

characters as desired.

• Partition mark

Sets the partition mark. Default : 3A (hexadecimal display, ASCII characters ":") Setting range : Enter any single ASCII or hexadecimal character.

• Inter delimiter

Sets the inter delimiter. Default : 2C (hexadecimal display, ASCII characters ",") Setting range : Enter any single ASCII or hexadecimal characters.

• Append data size

Set this option to append data size. Default : Disabled Setting range : Disable or Enable

• Append checksum

Set this option to append checksum function. Default : Disabled Setting range : Disable or Enable

Page 45

Operation

Important

 TIMING

• Timing Mode

Sets the method of measuring timing. Default : Level trigger Setting range : Level trigger or One-shot trigger

• One-shot trigger duration

Sets the measuring duration of one-shot trigger. Default : 1000 ms Setting range : 30 to 25500 ms (in units of 10 ms)

• Timing ON command

Sets the timing ON command characters. Default : 4C4F4E (hexadecimal display, ASCII characters "LON") Setting range : Enter a string using 8 or less ASCII or hexadecimal characters as

• Timing OFF command

Sets the timing OFF command characters. Default : 4C4F4646 (hexadecimal display, ASCII characters "LOFF") Setting range : Enter a string using 8 or less ASCII or hexadecimal characters as

• One-character timing recognition

Set to enable one-character timing recognition. Default : Disable Setting range : Disable or Enable

desired.

The following strings can recognize a timing ON/OFF command as one-character:

SOH (0x01) SO (0x0e) EM (0x19) STX (0x02) SI (0x0f) SUB (0x1a) ETX (0x03) DLE (0x10) FS (0x1c) EOT (0x04) DC1 (0x11) GS (0x1d) ENQ (0x05) DC2 (0x12) RS (0x1e) BEL (0x07) DC3 (0x13) US (0x1f) BS (0x08) DC4 (0x14) HT (0x09) SYN (0x16) VT (0x0b) ETB (0x17) FF (0x0c) CAN (0x18)

* If STX (0x02) or ETX (0x03) is set for

either the timing ON or OFF command, the command is not recognized in the "<STX> command <ETX>" format.

 Reading Behavior

• Reading Mode

Sets the reading mode. Default : Single Setting range : Single, Multi1, Multi2, or Burst read

• Data Transmission

Sets the timing to send data. Default : Send after read Setting range : Send after read or Send after timing off

• Duplicate reading prevention interval (x100 ms)

Sets the time to prevent reading the same code twice in the Multi1 Reading mode. Default : 1000 ms Setting range : 100 to 25500 ms (in units of 100 ms)

• Duplicate reading prevention interval reset

Sets the duplicate reading prevention interval reset. Default : Reset when a code is read Setting range : Reset when a code is read or Do not reset during duplicate

• Laser-Aim Pulse Duration.

Sets when Multi1 read mode or Multi2 read mode is specified. Default : 100 ms Setting range : 0 to 990 ms (Specify by the 10 ms)

• Read error string

Sets the reading error code. Default : 4552524F52 (hexadecimal display, ASCII characters "ERROR") Setting range : Enter a string using 8 or less ASCII or hexadecimal characters as

prevention interval

desired.

• Burst interval (x1 ms)

Sets the burst interval. Default : 0 ms Setting range : 0 to 255 ms

• Burst count

Sets the number of scans in the burst read mode. Default : 3 Setting range : 1 to 8

• Burst bank

Sets the bank used in the burst read mode. Default : Bank 1 Setting range : Bank 1 to Bank 10

 Master/Slave

• Operation setting

Sets the Master/Slave function operation. Default : Not used Setting range : Not used, Multi Drop or Multi Head

•Group name

Sets group name. Default : GROUP01 Setting range : Input up to 16 arbitrary characters using the ASCII character.

•Unit ID

Sets ID of SR-750. Default : 0 Setting range : 0 to 31

• Read data number for Multi Head mode

Sets the number of read data during multi head operation. Default : 1 Setting range : 1 to 8

 Alternate

• Priority bank

Sets the parameter bank to start reading when the Alternate function is used. Default : 1 Setting range : 1 to 10

•Order

Sets the alternate order changing method. When "Begin with successful bank" is set, the alternate comes from the parameter bank that was last read successfully. Default : Begin with successfully read bank Setting range : Sequential or Begin with successfully read bank

 Matching Function

• Matching level OK/NG judgment

Sets to judge the matching level when a reading was successful. Default : Disable Setting range : Disable or Enable

• Matching level threshold

Sets the threshold for matching level OK/NG judgment. Default : 70 Setting range : 0 to 99

 Code quality verification

• ISO/IEC15415 verification

Sets ISO/IEC15415 verification function. Default : Disable Setting range : Disable or Enable

• ISO/IEC15415 verification threshold

Sets the threshold of ISO/IEC15415 evaluation result. Default : Disable Setting range : Disable, D, C, B or A

• ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006) verification

Sets ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006) verification function. Default : Disable Setting range : Disable or Enable

• ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006) verification threshold

Sets the threshold of ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006) evaluation result. Default : Disable Setting range : Disable, D, C, B or A

E SR-750 UM

Page 46

• SAE AS9132 verification

Sets SAE AS9132 verification function. Default : Disable Setting range : Disable or Enable

• SAE AS9132 verification threshold

Sets the threshold of SAE AS9132 evaluation result. Default : Disable Setting range : Disable or Enable

• SEMI T10-0701 verification

Sets SEMI T10-0701 verification function. Default : Disable Setting range : Disable or Enable

• Select expression of grades

Set this option to select expression of quality grades. Default : Alphabet Setting range : Alphabet or Numeric

• Append detailed verification result

Sets the detailed verification result addition function when the verification result is appended. Default : Disable Setting range : Disable or Enable

• Append values

Sets the evaluation value addition function when the verification result is appended. Default : Disable Setting range : Disable or Enable

 Edit Data

• Data edit by script

Sets the edit data function. Default : Disable Setting range : Disable or Enable

 Additional Data

•Time

Set this option to append time. Default : Disabled Setting range : Disable or Enable

• Detail error code

Set the additional function for detailed read code. Default : Disable Setting range : Disable or Enable

• Code type

Set this option to append code type. Default : Disabled Setting range : Disable or Enable

• Symbol ID

Set this option to append symbol ID. Default : Disabled Setting range : Disable or Enable

• Parameter bank

Set this option to append bank number. Default : Disabled Setting range : Disable or Enable

• Burst number

Sets the additional function for burst number. Default : Disable Setting range : Disable or Enable

• Read count

Set this option to append scan count. Default : Disabled Setting range : Disable or Enable

• Position level

Set this option to append position measurement level. Default : Disabled Setting range : Disable or Enable

• Code vertex

Set this option to append corner coordinates of codes. Default : Disabled Setting range : Disable or Enable

• Code center

Set this option to append center coordinates of codes. Default : Disabled Setting range : Disable or Enable

• ECC level (UEC)

Set this option to append unused ECC ratio. Default : Disabled Setting range : Disable or Enable

• Matching level

Set this option to append matching level. Default : Disabled Setting range : Disable or Enable

• ISO/IEC15415 verification result

Set threshold of ISO/IEC15415 verification result. Default : Disable Setting range : Disable or Enable

• ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006) verification result

Sets ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006) verification result addition function. Default : Disable Setting range : Disable or Enable

• SAE AS9132 verification result

Sets SAE AS9132 verification result addition function. Default : Disable Setting range : Disable or Enable

• SEMI T10-0701 verification result

Default : Disable Setting range : Disable or Enable

• Image file name

Set this option to append image name. Default : Disabled Setting range : Disable or Enable

• Read time

Sets the read time function. Default : Disabled Setting range : Disable or Enable

•Group name

Sets the additional function for the group name used in the Master/Slave function. Default : Disable Setting range : Disable or Enable

• Master/Slave ID

Sets the additional function for Master/Slave ID. Default : Disable Setting range : Disable or Enable

 Comparison

• Comparison method

Sets the comparison method. Default : Normal Setting range : Normal or Sequential

•Origin

Sets the origin of comparison or preset. Default : 1 Setting range : 1 to 7089

•Length

Sets the length for comparison or preset. Default : 494 Setting range : Normal …0 to 494

Sequential …0 to 9

• Increment

When the comparison method is Sequential, set the increment. Default : 1 Setting range : - 9999 to 9999

• Preset data

Registers the preset data. Default : Not selected Setting range : Enter up to 494 ASCII or hexadecimal characters.

E SR-750 UM

Page 47

I/O

Saving Images

 Input Terminal Common

• Input polarity

Sets the input polarity of the IN terminal. Default : Norm. open Setting range : Norm. open or Norm. close

• Required input duration

Sets the required input duration for the IN terminal. Default : 2 ms Setting range : 1 ms, 2 ms, or 10 ms

 IN1/2 Terminal

• Function

Sets the function for the IN1/2 terminal. Default : IN1 terminal…Timing input

IN2 terminal…Preset input

Setting range : Disable, TIMING, Preset Input, TEST, Clear PLC link error,

TUNING

• Test mode

When "TEST" is selected, specify the test mode to start. Default : Reading rate test Setting range : Reading rate test, Read time test, or Positioning test

• Startup state

Sets whether to activate the input function specified for the IN1 and IN2 terminals at power-on. Default : Disable Setting range : Disable or Enable

• IN LED synchronization

Set whether to synchronize with IN LED. Default : IN1…Enable

IN2…Disabled

Setting range : Disable or Enable

 Output Terminal

• TRG BUSY Output at Power On

Set this option to enable TRG BUSY output upon reader startup. Default : Enable Setting range : Disable or Enable

• Output duration

Sets the output ON duration for the OUT terminal. Default : 500 ms Setting range : 10 to 2550 ms

• OUT1/2/3 function

Sets the function for the OUT1/2/3 terminal. Default OUT1…OK

OUT2…NG (Comparison NG), ERROR OUT3…TRG, LOCK, MODE, ERR BUSY

Setting range : OK, NG (Comparison NG), ERROR, STABLE, UNSTABLE,

PRESET OK, TUNING OK, TRG BUSY, LOCK BUSY, MODE BUSY, ERR BUSY, FILE BUSY or EXT.LIGHT

• External light output polarity

Sets the output polarity of the EXT.LIGHT signal. Default : Norm. open Setting range : Norm. open, Norm. closed

•OK image

Sets the saving option for images successfully read. Default : Disabled Setting range : Disabled or Send by FTP

•Comparison NG

Set save destination for comparison NG image. Default : Disable Setting range : Disabled or Send by FTP

•Error image

Sets the save destination for read error images. Default : Save to RAM Setting range : Disabled, Save to RAM, Save to ROM, or Send by FTP

• Unstable image

Sets the save destination for unstable images. Default : Disable Setting range : Disabled or Send by FTP

• Target burst number

Default : All banks

• Captured image

Sets the saving option for captured images. Default : Save to RAM Setting range : Save to RAM or Send by FTP

• Image Save Mode

Sets the image saving mode. Default : Save final bank image Setting range : Save final bank image, Save specified number of images after

timing ON, or Save specified number of images after timing OFF

• Number of images to save

Sets the number of images to save after the timing ON/OFF. Default : 10 images Setting range : 1 to 10 images

• Edit image file name by script (FTP transmission only)

Sets the edit image file name function. Default : Disable Setting range : Disable or Enable

 FTP Settings

• IP address

Sets the IP address of the remote FTP server. Default : 0.0.0.0 Setting range : 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

• User/Password

Sets the user name/password of the destination required for FTP client operations. Default : User…admin

Password…admin

Setting range : Up to 16 characters

Set in ASCII characters.

• Passive mode

Set this option to send passive commands to the remote FTP server. Default : Disable Setting range : Enable or Disable

• Change directory

Set this option to change FTP remote directory. Default : Disabled Setting range : Disable or Enable

• Format

Sets the image format sent via FTP. Default : JPEG Setting range: JPEG, Bitmap

• JPEG quality

Default : 5 Setting range : 1 to 10

• Binning

Default : 1/4 Setting range: Full, 1/4, 1/16, 1/64

• Directory name

Sets the remote directory. Default : image Setting range : 1 to 32 characters

E SR-750 UM

Page 48

• Keep connected

Check this option to let reader send connection requests whenever the connection is closed. Default : Disabled Setting range : Disable or Enable

• Send NOOP command

Sets whether to send NOOP commands periodically. Default : Enable Setting range : Disable or Enable

• NOOP command interval (minutes)

Sets the sending interval for NOOP commands. Default : 1 minute Setting range : 1 to 10 (minutes)

Misc

• Output data on TEST button

Sets the data output when the TEST button is pressed. Default : Enable Setting range : Disable or Enable

• Filling size

Sets the data filling size. This fills the missing digits with the specified data filling characters when the read data is less than the set size. Default : 0 Setting range : 0 to 999

• Filling character

Sets the data filling characters. Default : 20 (hexadecimal display, ASCII characters "(SP)") Setting range : Enter any single ASCII or hexadecimal characters.

• Silent Mode

Set this option to enable silent mode. Default : Not selected Setting range : Comparison OK and Read OK, Comparison NG, Read ERROR,

Stable Reading (OK/Comparison NG), Unstable Reading (OK/ Comparison NG), Preset Result, or Test mode

•Reader

Sets the reader name. Default : READER Setting range : Up to 8 characters

• Monitor output data priority display position

Sets the monitor output data priority display position. Default : Forward Setting range : Forward or Backward

• TUNE button

Sets Enable/Disable of the TUNE button. Default : Unlock Setting range : Unlock or Lock

• Laser-aim option with TUNE button

Sets the pointer lighting condition by TUNE button operation. Default : By operation

Setting range : Lock.............................The laser pointer does not light up by

TUNE button operation or each operation mode.

Test mode only ............Only in the test mode, the pointer lights

up by the TUNE button.

Run mode only ............Only in the run mode, the pointer lights

up by the TUNE button.

By operation ................Regardless of the test mode or the run

mode, the pointer lights up by the TUNE button.

• Display bank number

Sets the parameter bank number display of reading success for the multiple LED indicator. Default : Enable Setting range : Enable or Disable

 Trigger command response

• Specify response character

Sets the LON and LOFF trigger command response. Default : Disable Setting range : Disable, SR-600 compatible and User setting

• SR-600 compatible Set this option to enable the SR-600 compatible mode. For details, refer to

"3-9 SR-600 Compatible Output Mode (Page 19)".

• User setting Sets the response for the following commands to Success response character or Failure response character.

•LON

•LONmm

•LOFF

•PRON

•PROFF

• RESET

•BCLR

• Success response character

Sets the response character string when LON and LOFF is normally processed. Default : OK (0x4F4B) Setting range : Up to 8 characters

Set with ASCII or HEX.

• Failure response character

Sets the response character string when the process (e.g. LON is sent during LON. LOFF is sent during reading standby.) fails. Default : ER (0x4552) Setting range : Up to 8 characters

Set with ASCII or HEX.

 SNTP

• SNTP server address

Sets the SNTP server address.

• Time zone

Sets the time zone of the country where SR-750 is used. Default : +9:00 Japan, Seoul

• Update cycle (min)

Sets the time update cycle. Default : 1 Setting range : 1 to 99

E SR-750 UM

Page 49

5-5

Important

Sending/Receiving Configuration

5-6 Saving/Reading a

This section explains the transmission of a configuration between AutoID Network Navigator and the SR-750 Series.

Sending Configuration to the SR-750 Series

1 Select the SR-750 Series unit registered in the reader list, and click

the button.

2 When the transmission finishes with the message "Configuration

sent successfully.", the settings specified on the individual tabs have been written to the SR-750 Series.

Configuration File

The specified settings can be saved as a configuration file or read from a configuration file.

Saving a Configuration File

1 Select the SR-750 Series unit registered in the reader list, and click

the button.

You can also save a configuration file from the "File", "Save", "Save As ", or "Save All" commands in the menu bar.

2 When the "Save As" dialog box is displayed, enter the file name.

As the edit data function or the edit image file name function is used, if "Use script" is enabled, the following window appears.

Receiving Configuration from the SR-750 Series

1 Select the SR-750 Series unit registered in the reader list, and click

the button.

2 When the settings are received for the configuration file currently

being edited, the following message is displayed: Click "Yes" to save the configuration file currently being edited, click "No" to not save, or "Cancel" to cancel receiving the configuration.

The file is saved with the "ptc" extension.

When the setting to use the edit data function or the edit image file name function has been made, the message box to save the script file appears. Press "Yes" to save the script file.

3 Click the "Save" button.

The configuration will be saved in the specified file.

Reading Configuration Files

1 Click the button.

3 When the reception finishes with the message "Configuration

retrieved successfully.", the configuration of the SR-750 Series have been reflected on the tabs of AutoID Network Navigator.

E SR-750 UM

Page 50

2 Select a file from the "Open" dialog box.

Important

(1)

(4)

(2)

(3)

3 Click the "Open" button.

The settings saved in that file will be displayed.

5-7 Quick Setup Code

Create a quick setup code based upon details set in AutoID Network Navigator. You can read a printed quick setup code into the SR-750 Series unit, and change settings. Refer to "3-10 Batch Setting Code (Page 20)"

Printing Quick Setup Codes

1 Select the SR-750 Series unit registered in the reader list, and click

the button.

5-8 Terminal

Click the [Terminal] icon, and the terminal screen will be displayed. The terminal can be used to confirm data read by the SR-750 Series unit, or send commands to the SR-750 Series unit. Additionally, the terminal screen can be used to start the Live View window, and confirm in real time read images.

Terminal Screen

The terminal screen has 2 types of display mode.

[Normal] view

(1) Reader list

If multiple SR-750 Series units are registered in AutoID Network Navigator, specify in the terminal the SR-750 Series unit to confirm. The reader name, model and IP address are displayed.

[Advanced] button

Changes the terminal screen to [Advanced] view.

(2) Command button

Button to operate the SR-750 Series unit.

"LON" ........Same operation as the Timing ON command.

"LOFF" ......Same operation as the Timing OFF command.

"TEST1" ....Activates the reading rate test mode.

"TEST2" ....Activates the tact measurement test mode.

"QUIT" ....... Quits the test mode in operation.

(3) Display area

Displays data from the SR-750 Series, commands sent using the command button, and response histories.

(4) [Live View] button

Click to start Live View.

[Clear] button

Delete history data from the display area.

2 Enter any comments, or change the Error Correction Level value in

the QR code section as necessary.

• Comment : Any comments that have been entered will be printed.

• Error correction level : Quick setup codes are printed with the Error Correction Level specified.

3 Click the "Print" button.

When reading a quick setup code with the high-resolution type model (SR-750HA), make sure to use a printer with high print quality. When a printer with low print quality is used, the cells in the 2D code may bleed and become unreadable. Be sure to use a printer with 300 dpi or more for printing.

[Printout sample]

[Advanced] view

By switching to [Advanced] view, you can save action commands to the SR-750 Series, sent of control commands, and acquired history log file log data. Click the [Normal] button to switch to the [Normal] mode display.)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

E SR-750 UM

Page 51

(1) Edit Message

• File type Setting range : Bitmap, JPEG Default Windows7/Vista : Bitmap

WindowsXP : JPEG

• Quality (when JPEG selected) Setting range : 1 to 10 Default : 5

• Binning Setting range : None, 1/4, 1/16 Default Windows7/Vista : 1/4

WindowsXP : None

Area in which to input commands to send to the SR-750 Series.

• Header/Terminator Specify headers and terminators for commands to send to the SR-750 Series. Default : None/CR Setting range : None/CR, STX/ETX

• Command Input commands to send to the SR-750 Series. Use the ▼ button to display the sent commands history.

• Check command You can confirm message format comprising selected headers/terminators as well as input commands.

• [Send] button Click this to send the input command to the SR-750 Series unit.

•Script Script files can be sent from the terminal to SR-750. Press the " " button, select the applicable file, and then press the "Send" button to set.

(2) Display area

Displays data from the SR-750 Series, commands sent using the command button, and response histories. You can click the (4) [View Mode] button to switch between the command/ response screen and the output data display methods.

(3) [Save log] button

You can save the history data from the display area as a log file.

1 Click the [Save log] button. The "Logging" window will be displayed.

When specifying the save location, click the [Browse…] button. If not changing the save location, click the [OK] button without making any changes.

• Append : select this to add new data if there is already saved log

information.

• Binary : select this to save as binary format data.

5-9 LiveView

Click the [Live View] icon to display the Live View screen. The Live View screen enables real-time display of scanned image data. Additionally, the Live View screen enables tuning operations and starting of test mode as with in the [Read] tab. * Displaying the Live View screen also starts the terminal screen. This section only

explains the Live View screen.

Details of the Live View screen

(2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(1)

(7)

(1) Parameter bank display window

Displays the latest images read by of all parameter banks. Images can be enlarged by double-clicking. When the border of each image is green, this indicates a successful read, whereas a red border indicates a failed read.

(2) [Bank display/hide switch] button

Click this to switch between display/hide for the parameter bank display window and the camera status display window.

(3) [Live View screen] button

Click to change the Live View screen quality.

2 When the [Save As] is displayed, specify a file name. (The default setting is

terminal.log)

3 Click the [Save] button to save the log data.

4 When saving of the log is complete, click the [Save log] button again.

[Example log file]

(4) Displayed image

Set image conditions for images displayed on the monitor. Default : All Setting range : All, read images only, errors only

(5) Displayed number

Set the bank No. for images displayed on the monitor. Default : All Setting range : ALL, 1 to 10 (parameter bank No.)

(6) [Zoom in/Zoom out] button

You can click this button, then click the image on the screen to zoom in or zoom out.

Zoom in ......... right double-click the image

Zoom out ....... left double-click the image

E SR-750 UM

Page 52

(7) [Save image] button

(1)

(2)

(3)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

Right click on the capture image, and select the display.

Click this to save the image displayed on the monitor screen. The default file name is <time indicated on PC>_<read result judgment>. <file extension>. The file extension is determined according to the setting of the live view image quality. (Bitmap or jpeg) In the reading judgment, the following characters are displayed.

• When reading is successful: OK

• When reading error occurs, the capture image: ERR

• Monitor image: XX

* The verification judgment result of the preset registration data is not reflected.

[Clear] button

Click to clear the monitor screen and parameter bank display window screen.

Burst read Live View

During burst read mode operation, this displays a dedicated Live View screen.

(1) [Burst read] window

Displays images for the specified burst scan count.

(2) Read history graph

Displays the history of performed burst reading operations on a graph. (Displays maximum of 8) Orange : displays the image at the time of scan Blue : displays the decoding time image (total of decoding time during burst

read).

Gray : displays a read fail.

(3) Read history display

Displays the implementation history of performed burst reading operations on a graph. * Image transfer time is an approximation when an image is obtained with the

computer.

5-10

Click the [Image View] icon to display the image view screen. On the image view screen, you can confirm images saved in the SR-750 Series unit RAM/ROM, image captures, and read images saved on the PC.

ImageView

Details of the image view screen

(1) Display 1

Displays images obtained with the SR-750 Series unit. Instant captures and images selected as thumbnails are displayed here.

: [Open] button .....click to display image files saved on the PC.

: [Save] button......save image files displayed on the screen as bitmap

(2) Display 2

Use to display image files saved on the PC. Use for comparisons with images displayed on display 1.

(3) Instant Capture

Capture images to the SR-750 Series unit. Specify the parameter bank number, then click the [Capture] button. Instant captures are displayed on display 1, but to display on display 2, right click on the instant capture image, and select the display.

(4) Thumbnail

Displays images saved in the SR-750 Series RAM/ROM. Click the [Refresh] button to display the latest image saved in RAM/ROM. Right-click images displayed as thumbnails to display on display 1 a zoomed image. To display on display 2, right-click the thumbnail image, and select the display.

files.

E SR-750 UM

Page 53

Image view screen in burst read mode

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

Right-click on the file name.

(7) (8)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

Thumbnail display is the burst read mode display. Display burst images in order of scanning, and display images that could not be decoded on the error screen.

5-12

Click the [Installation Guide] icon to display the Installation guide screen. Use the cell and symbol size to confirm the distance and field of view size that can be used with the SR-750 Series unit. Use when confirming the field of view when changing the symbol size, and when calculating moving exposures.

Installation Guide

Details of the Installation Guide screen

5-11

Click the [FileView] icon to display the FileView screen. You can confirm, save, and delete image and configuration files saved in the SR-750 Series RAM/ROM.

FileView

Details of the file view screen

(1) Reader list

If multiple units of the SR-750 Series are connected on the same network, then select on the FileView screen the SR-750 Series unit to confirm. The reader name, model and IP address are displayed in the reader.

(2) File

Select the file types to display in FileView.

(3) File list

Displays files selected in (2). Right-click on the file name to display the menu, from where you can perform [Open], [Delete], and [Save] operations.

* The file list does not differentiate between RAM/ROM.

(4) [Refresh] button

Updates the file list.

 Specifications

Area for input of conditions of codes to read.

(1) Parameter options

Select the methods by which to specify code conditions.

• Specify cell size and symbol size ....method for inputting the cell size (narrow

bar width) and the size of the code to print.

• Specify symbol size ...method for inputting the code size. Use if the cell size is

uncertain.

• Specify cell size......... method for inputting the cell size. Use if the data size

(length) is not set.

(2) Code tab

Select the code to read. 5 types of code (i.e. QR, DataMatrix, CODE39, CODE128, GS1 DataBar) can be calculated in the installation guide.

• Code type......... select form QR (model 2),

QR (model 1), MicroQR.

• Symbol size...... input the vertical and

horizontal lengths (including margins).

• Cell size ........... input the cell size.

• Version ............. input the QR code version.

• Data type.......... select from numeric, ASCII,

binary, or Kanji.

• ECC level ......... select from L, M, Q, and H.

• Max data size ... calculated from the version, data type, and error correction level.

DataMatrix

• Code type......... DataMatrix supports only

ECC200.

• Symbol size...... input the vertical and

horizontal lengths (including margins).

• Cell size ........... input the cell size.

• Number of cells ... select from the drop-down

menu.

• Data type.......... Select from numeric, ASCII,

or binary.

• Max data size ... Calculated from the cell numbers and data type.

E SR-750 UM

Page 54

CODE39

Calculates the distance from the code surface to the SR750 Series unit as well as the size of the fie ld of view as input in (3).

Mounting distance as input in (3)

Reading distance * The read di stance is calculate with a standard mounting

angle (15°).

Input the planned line speed

Specify the planned exposure in calibration settings.

CODE128

GS1 DataBar

• Symbol size...... input the vertical and

•

Narrow bar width

• Data length....... input the data length.

• Symbol size...... input the vertical and

•

Narrow bar width

• Data length....... input the data length.

• Symbol size...... input the vertical and

•

Narrow bar width

horizontal lengths (excluding margins).

... Input the narrow bar width.

horizontal lengths (excluding margins).

... Input the narrow bar width.

horizontal lengths (excluding margins).

... Input the narrow bar width.

 Mounting conditions

Input the mounting distance of the SR-750 Series, and you can calculate the size of the field of view, and the exposure for moving reads. Additionally, this displays the code read range (depth) specified in specifications.

(3) Mounting distance

Input the mounting distance, or move the slide bar.

(4) [FOV Simulation] button

Click this to display the distance input in (3), and the reading view range format selected in (5). Additionally, you can also confirm the read distance of the SR750 Series unit.

5-13

AutoID Network Navigator can export configured settings values as a text file.

Export Reader Configuration

Steps to export settings values

1 From [File] on the menu bar, select [Export Reader Configuration…].

2 The [Save As] window will be displayed. Input the file name, and

click [Save] button.

[Moving] button

Click this to open the Moving window. Input the speed of the line upon which the SR-750 Series is used to calculate the standard exposure. Input an exposure shorter than that calculated here in the calibration configuration, and carry out quick tuning. If tuning is possible, then this judges that the set tracking at the set line speed is possible.

(5) Mounting distance standard graph

Displays the mounting distance depth based upon the cell size calculated in specifications on a bar graph. Check the model name to be used and decide the distance of (3) within the range displayed in the bar graph.

(6) Mounting distance judgment area

Displays the field of view size, minimum cell size, and pixels/cell for the specified mounting distance. If the code specified in "Specifications" is judged to be not readable at the distance specified in mounting distance, then the characters will be displayed in red.

(7) "Output Report Data" button

Click to output the data for the installation report.

(8) [Close] button

Click this to close the Installation guide.

3 This concludes export of the table.

[Example configuration file]

E SR-750 UM

Page 55

5-14

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10) (11)

Double-click the report data or click the " Edit" button to open the selected report screen. Then, you ca n edit the comment.

Report Generator Function

Report generator function

The report generator function of the AutoID Network Navigator outputs tuning results and reading test results of the 2D code reader SR-750 Series, SR-650 Series and SR-D100 Series, and also outputs the conditions specified in the installation guide, etc. Use this function to make reports of device test results, adjustment results before operation, etc.

Using the report generator function

Activating the report generator function

Start the report generator function by selecting "File" → "Report Generator" → "SR-750", "SR-650" or "SR-D100" on the menu bar.

Report generator function screen

The following screen will appear. * The model name is displayed in the

title. The format is the same.

(1) Date created, Author

Enter information for the date created and author. (Up to 20 characters)

(2) Report Data

This displays the data type and order to be output to the report. (Registration available up to 100 items)

(3) Open, Save

Open ...This reads the report

generator file form.

Save .... This saves the report

generator file form. (Saved with the file extension: rai)

(4) Initialize

This initializes the report generator function screen.

(5) Up/Down button

This switches the order of the report selected on (2) (Report Data).

(6) New

Use this to create reports without the imported file.

(7) Import

Uses this to import the report data.

(8) Edit

This edits the report selected on (2) (Report Data).

(9) Delete

This deletes the report selected on (2) (Report Data).

(10) Output Report

This outputs the report data to the Excel file.

(11) Close

The report generator function screen is closed.

Report output procedure

(1) Preparation of original data

Generate necessary data on the report using the SR-750 Series, SR-650 Series or SR-D100 Series.

• Tuning data

• Reading test data

• Setting condition data, etc.

(2) Deciding the report format

Start the report generator function and import the data created for (1). Use the up/down buttons to change the output order of report data, or use the edit button to additionally write to each report data and then create your target report.

(3) Report output

Output the report-generated data to the Excel file. * To use the report generator function, install Microsoft Office Excel to your PC

beforehand.

E SR-750 UM

Page 56

5-15

"Output Report Data" button

"Tuning report" button

Creating Reports for the SR-750 Series

 Editing the report data

Start the report generator function and import the "Installation Report" to the Report Data section. The following is the editing screen of the imported report data.

Data that can be generated as report

The following data can be used for the SR-750 Series.

• Installation Report (extension: rig) This outputs the report created on the installation guide including information such as working distance, size of field of view and exposure for moving, and also detailed information of codes entered to determine the conditions.

• Reading Report (extension: rtn) This outputs the result of auto tuning performed with the Live View activated, tuning image and the tuning graph.

• Test Report (extension: rbt) This outputs the results of reading rate measurement test and tact measurement test performed with the Live View activated, and also outputs the setting value, reading rate, brightness and read time of the parameter bank which performed the reading test.

The following items can be added to the report using the "New" button.

• Workpiece

• Reference Image Bitmap or JPEG image files can be added to output to the report. Also, workpiece images or setting environment images can be used as supplement materials.

Use the above items and create the target report.

(1)

(2)

(1) Title

Enter the title of the installation report (up to 20 characters). This is used as a sheet name when output to the Excel file.

(2) Specification, Setting Condition

This displays the specification and setting condition specified on the installation guide.

• Specification: Code specifications for the specified 2D code and barcode

• Setting Condition: This displays the specified working distance and the size of field of view. If the "Moving" information is entered on the installation guide, it will be reflected in the "Moving" item.

* When creating the reading report using the "New" button, all items can be

entered.

Reading Report

Report data generation method and report format

This section describes the generation method of each report data and describes the report format.

Installation Report

 Generating the report data

Generate the data for the installation report using the installation guide of AutoID Network Navigator. When all values are entered on the installation guide, click the "Output Report Data" button and save the report data.

• Dividing file names can bring together generated multiple data under conditions where the working distance, etc. were changed, into one report. When creating reports under different conditions, save the report data changing file names.

 Generating the report data

Start the Live View of AutoID Network Navigator, perform tuning and obtain data for the reading report. When the tuning operation is complete, click the "Tuning report" button and save the report data.

• "Live View" screen

• Generate report data using the latest tuning data. When tuning is performed multiple times, generate the report data each time the tuning result is obtained.

• Saving data by changing file names can bring together the generated multiple data into one report. When creating reports using various tuning results, save the report data changing file names.

E SR-750 UM

Page 57

 Editing the report data

(1)

(2) (3)

(4)

"Test Report" button

(1)

(3)

(2)

(4)

(1)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(2)

Start the report generator function and import the "Reading Report" to the Report Data section. The following is the editing screen of the imported report data.

 Editing the report data

Start the report generator function and import the "Test Report" to the Report Data section. The following is the editing screen of the imported report data.

(1) Title

Enter the title of the reading report (up to 20 characters). This is used as a sheet name when output to the Excel file.

(2) Reading Results

This displays the tuning conditions and tuning result values.

(3) Review, Remarks

Put your review or remarks regarding the tuning result. (Review: Up to 100 characters, Remarks: Up to 255 characters)

(4) Captured image, Tuning graph

This displays the tuning result image obtained in tuning and the tuning graph.

* When creating the reading report using the "New" button, all items can be

entered. Also, Bitmap and JPEG files can be imported to the captured image and tuning graph.

Test Report

 Generating the report data

Start the Live View of AutoID Network Navigator, specify the bank to tune/test, perform the reading rate measurement test and tact measurement test, and obtain data for the test report. When the test operation is complete, click the "Test Report" button and save the report data.

• "Live View" screen

(1) Title

Enter the title of the test report (up to 20 characters). This is used as a sheet name when output to the Excel file.

(2) Test Results

This displays the reading test results.

• Test Result : Reading rate (%), Matching level, Read time (ms)

• Test Details : This displays the setting values of parameter bank used for the

test.

(3) Review, Remarks

Put your review or remarks regarding the test results. (Review: Up to 100 characters, Remarks: Up to 255 characters)

(4) Captured image

This displays the last image at the reading test. * Any Bitmap image or JPEG image can also be inserted.

* When creating the reading report using the "New" button, all items can be

entered. Also, Bitmap and JPEG files can be imported to the captured image.

Workpiece Report

Use the workpiece report for supplemental explanations such as adding a reading target workpiece image to the report. Import the workpiece picture (Bitmap or JPEG) and create as report data.

 Editing the report data

The following is the editing screen for the workpiece report.

• Generate report data using the latest test data. When multiple bank tests are performed, generate the report data each time the test result is obtained.

• Saving data by changing file names can bring together the generated multiple data into one report. When creating reports using results of test performed at various parameter banks, save the report data changing file names for each test performed.

(1) Title

Enter the title of the workpiece report (up to 20 characters). This is used as a sheet name when output to the Excel file.

(2) Workpiece image

Import image data that shows the entire image of the target workpiece. (Bitmap or jpeg)

(3) Captured image

Import the image obtained with the SR-750 Series.

(4) Detail 1 to 4

Up to 4 detailed images of workpiece can be imported. (Bitmap or jpeg)

(5) Workpiece name

Enter the workpiece name or other comments. (Up to 255 characters)

E SR-750 UM

Page 58

Reference Image Report

(1)

(2)

"Output Report" button

Save as an arbitrary file name.

This can be used as a supplemental explanation report using other image data.

 Editing the report data

The following is the editing screen for the reference image report.

(1) Title

Enter the title of the reference image report (up to 20 characters). This is used as a sheet name when output to the Excel file.

(2) Reference Image

Enter the image data and remarks regarding the image. Up to 9 reference images can be registered. Image 1 to 9: Bitmap or jpeg data Remarks: Up to 255 characters

Excel report image

This is the image when the report is output to the Excel file.

 Installation Report

 Reading Report

Report output method

This outputs the collected report data to the Excel file. The EXCEL file can be modified according to your preference.

 Report output method

Click the "Output Report" button on the report generator screen and save as an Excel file to the specified folder.

 Test Report

E SR-750 UM

Page 59

 Workpiece Report

 Reference Image Report

E SR-750 UM

Page 60

6-1 Before Mounting the

TEST TUNE

SR-625

POWERR

NETIN

STB

OK/NG/

Photoelectric sensor

Change sensor position

Shield from ambient light

Obstruction

Light

Code

Change the position of the obstruction so that the path of ligaht is unhindered

Light

15°

This angle is essential for proper reading.

Metallic surface

TEST TUNE

SR-625

POWERR

NETIN

STB

OK/NG/

Apply black tape to the metallic surface to prevent reflection

TEST TUNE

SR-625

POWERR

NETIN

STB

OK/NG/

TEST TUNE

SR-625

POWERR

NETIN

STB

OK/NG/

Code

SR-750 Series

TEST TUNE

SR-625

POWERR

NETIN

STB

OK/NG/

TEST TUNE

SR-625

POWERR

NETIN

STB

OK/NG/

Install a shield

Provide sufficient distance with which there is no interference.

NOTICE

TEST TUNE

SR-625

POWERR

NET IN

STB

OK/NG/

Mounting bracket

Included mounting screw (M4) Tighting torque 0.5 N•m

TEST TUNE

SR-625

POWERR

NET IN

STB

OK/NG/

Mounting screw (M4)

Wash er

Insulating spacer

Mounting screw (M4)

6-2

Mounting the SR-750 Series

SR-750 Series

This section describes points to be checked before mounting the SR-750 Series. Check the mounting conditions as follows.



Confirm that ambient light (sunlight, other lights, photoelectric sensors, etc.) is not affecting the SR-750 Series.

Prevent ambient light from entering the light receiving area for the SR-750 Series. Ambient light may lead to unstable readings or incorrect readings.

Remedy

 Check whether the reader's beam is obstructed.

If the beams of light are obstructed, the barcode may become undetectable.

Remedy

TEST TUNE

POWERR

OK/NG/

STB

NETIN

SR-625

This section describes the mounting method of the SR-750 Series.

When using the included mounting bracket

1 Attach the SR-750 Series to the included mounting bracket.

Select the appropriate mounting method from below according to the application.

TEST

POWERR

OK/NG/

TUNE

STB

NET IN

SR-625

2 Fix the mounting bracket to the device.

* Mounting screws (M4) are not included. The thickness of the mounting

bracket, insulating spacer and washer included is approximately 4 mm.



Check whether the reader's angle creates a specular reflection.

If the beam reflects on the code at a right angle (specular reflection), the reading may be unstable or incorrect.

Remedy

 Confirm there are no metallic or mirrored surfaces in the

light receiving area.

If strong reflected light from a shiny surface enters the receiver of the SR-750 Series, the reading may become unstable or produce unstable results.

TEST TUNE

POWERR

OK/NG/

STB

NETIN

SR-625

Remedy

 When using several SR-750 Series in a row, confirm that

they do not interfere with each other.

If light from one SR-750 Series unit enters the receiver of another, the reading may become unstable.

3 Adjust the installation angle of the SR-750 Series.

The adjustment angle for the mounting bracket is ± 10°.

• Be sure to mount the supplied insulation spacer to suppress the influences of electrical noise from the device. If the insulation spacer is not mounted, electrical noise may be generated causing reading error or incorrect reading.

• On the bottom of the mounting bracket, the insulation sheet is attached. Do not peel off this sheet.

When not using the included mounting bracket

With this method, you can attach the SR-750 Series to the device without using the included mounting bracket. Prepare the following item before mounting the SR-750 Series.

• Main unit mounting screw (M4)...Screw hole depth of the SR-750 Series: 5 mm

1 Fix the SR-750 Series at the mounting position with M4 screws.

(Tighting torque 0.5 N•m)

TEST TUNE

SR-625

NET IN

POWERR

OK/NG/

STB

E SR-750 UM

Remedy

Page 61

2 Adjust the installation angle and distance of the SR-750 Series.

NOTICE

SR-75L4/75L6

Tightening torque of the supplied mounting screws (M3): 0.8 N•m

15°

Reading distance

The angle of the SR-750 Series scanner is 15° with reference to the perpendicular line from the back side of the main unit.

TEST TUNE

SR-625

POWERR

NET IN

STB

OK/NG/

Focal distance SR-750HA : 38 mm SR-750 : 60 mm SR-751 : 100 mm SR-752 : 250 mm

TEST TUNE

SR-625

POWERR

NET IN

STB

OK/NG/

Ethernet cable

To suppress the influence of electrical noise from the device, provide insulation for the mounting part of the SR-750 Series and the device.

NOTICE

If insulation is not provided, electrical noise may be generated causing reading error or incorrect reading.

Mounting the lens attachment (SR-75L4/75L6)

Following is the mounting procedure of the lens attachment (SR-75L4/75L6). Fix the lens attachment using the 2 supplied mounting screws (M3). Do not allow fingerprints, etc. to attach to the reading surface or lens surface of SR752 when mounting.

Do not allow water, dust or oil to attach to the scanner. Reading error may occur. If soil is attached, wipe it off lightly using a dry and soft cloth. (Do not soak the cloth in alcohol.)

6-3 Adjusting the Mounting

Adjusting the reading distance and code position

 Standard reading distance of the SR-750 Series (focal

distance)

The SR-750 Series provides the most stable reading when it is mounted at the following distances.

Typ e Model Distance

High resolution SR-750HA 38 mm

Short-range SR-750 60 mm

Mid-range SR-751 100 mm

Long-range SR-752 250 mm

 Code position adjustment

The SR-750 Series is equipped with the laser pointer to adjust the code position. Using the laser pointer enables you to adjust the most appropriate code position easily.

1 Press the TUNE button once on the SR-750 Series to emit the laser

pointer.

The laser pointer emits a laser beam as shown below. * When SR-75L4/75L is attached, the emission of the laser pointer is not

visible.

Position

When mounting the SR-750 Series, adjust the installation angle and distance as shown below.

Installation angle

The scanner of the SR-750 Series is tilted at a 15 degrees angle against the code surface. An optimal reading stability can be achieved when mounted with this angle.

• Do not mount the unit so its scanner face is parallel to the code surface. The optimal calibration may not be achieved or the reading may become unstable due to the light received from specular

NOTICE

reflection.

• The distances or angles that can be used for reading may vary according to the print quality and size of the code to be read or surrounding environment. Use the test mode, etc. to confirm the most appropriate mounting condition in the environment.

2 The position where the right and left laser beams cross is the center

point of the visual field.

Adjust the center position of the code to this point.

6-4 Confirming the Reading

Stability

After mounting the SR-750 Series, check the reading stability with the mounted state. There are 2 methods for confirming the reading stability as follows.

• Using AutoID Network Navigator

• Using the "TUNE" and "TEST" buttons on the main unit.

This section explains the method using AutoID Network Navigator.

1 Using the Ethernet cable, connect the SR-750 Series to the computer

with the AutoID Network Navigator installed.

ETHERNET

POWER

2 Start the AutoID Network Navigator and connect with the SR-750

Series.

3 Press the "Laser-aim" button to emit the laser pointer and adjust the

code position.

E SR-750 UM

Page 62

4 Press the "Monitor" button to check the code position.

5 Press the "Tuning" button to perform calibration for the code.

6 Press the "Reading test" button to check the reading stability.

7 Checking the screen, perform fine adjustment of the installation

angle and distance.

E SR-750 UM

Page 63

7-1 Communication of the

Command communication

PC/PLC/ Touch panel

Data port 1

Data port 2

PC/PLC/ Touch panel

PC/PLC/ Touch panel (field network)

NOTICE

ESC

ETX

SR-750 Series

To communicate with a control device, the SR-750 Series has interfaces for RS232C communication and Ethernet communication. For these communication interfaces, the communication ports can be set as follows:

• Command port Communication port to process operation/configuration commands and responses sent from a control device.

• Data port 1 Port to output result data from the SR-750 Series.

• Data port 2 Port to output result data from the SR-750 Series. This port is mainly used for control on the PLC link or field network.

Communication Port Assigning Image by Connection Method

This section describes communication port assigning images for different connection methods between the SR-750 Series and a control device.

 When sending operation/setting commands via RS-232C

Communication

Port Interface

Command port

RS-232C

Data port 1

RS-232C

 When EtherNet/IP communication is the main

communication

Port Interface

Data port 2

The above settings are valid when controlling the SR-750 Series using EtherNet/IP. When sending setting commands or operation commands from the control device for the purpose of adjustment, etc., select the appropriate host interface (RS-232C or Ethernet) for the Command and Data ports. * Setting the Data port 2 enables output to 2 types.

• PLC link, EtherNet/IP and PROFINET communications cannot be assigned to the Data port 1. Use the Data port 2.

• RS-232C communication can be assigned only to either Data port 1 or Data port 2.

Ethernet

(EtherNet/IP)

7-2 Data Communication

Format

This section describes the data communication format of the SR-750 Series. The data communication format is common for both the RS-232C and Ethernet.

Communication Format for Read Data

Read data is sent using the ASCII code with the header and terminator added, as shown below.

Header Read Data Terminator

This is the setting method for all basic communications using RS-232C. To perform data control over a network, set the Data port 1 to Ethernet-TCP protocol. * By setting the Data port 2 to Ethernet, data can be output to 2 types of Ethernet

device.

 When sending operation/setting commands via Ethernet

Communication

Port Interface

Command port

Ethernet

Data port 1

This is the setting method for all basic communications using Ethernet. * By setting the Data port 2 to RS-232C, data can be output to RS-232C and 2

types of Ethernet device.

Ethernet

 Perform reading operations using the trigger input

terminal

Port Interface

Data port 1

RS-232C

Ethernet

Various data can be appended for read data. Header and terminator can be selected from the following using AutoID Network Navigator. They also can be set to any string up to 5 characters.

z Header

STX

None/ (0x02) / (0x1B)

z Ter min ator

(0x0D) / (0x0D) (0x0A) / (0x03)

Read Error Codes

If the code cannot be read, the SR-750 Series will send a reading error code to the control device.

Read error code default setting: ERROR

Header ERROR Terminator

Read error codes can be set to any string of text, up to 8 characters, using AutoID Network Navigator. Additionally, the device can be set to not send error codes.

The above settings are valid when performing reading operations of the SR-750 Series using the trigger input. Set the Data port 1 and Data port 2 according to the control devices connected. When sending setting commands from the control device, select the appropriate host interface (RS-232C or Ethernet) for the Command port. * Setting the Data port 2 enables output to 2 types.

E SR-750 UM

Page 64

Appending Data

Header

Data size Read data + appended data

Ter mi-

nator

Checksum

Various types of data can be appended to read data.

 Read data format

The data format for appending various types of data to read data is shown below:

Data

Time

size

Positioning

Code vertex

level

coordinates

ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006) verification result

Detail error

code

Code center

coordinates

SAE AS9132

verification

result

Code

type

Unused

ECC ratio

Symbol IDRead

Matching

SEMI T10-0701

verification

result

level

data

file name

ISO/IEC15415

verification

Image

Parameter

bank

numbers

result

Group

name

Burst

number

Master/

Slave ID

Scan

count

Read

Check-

time

sum

Delimiter characters

• The colon (:) as a delimiting character can be changed via AutoID Network Navigator (one character).

• No delimiter character is inserted after "Data size" and "Symbol ID", and before "Checksum".

Precautions when appending data

• Appended data can be set via a command or from AutoID Network Navigator.

• Only the selected data will be appended to the read data. The data size changes because of this.

• Checksum defers by the contents of the appended data.

Details of Appended Data

 Data size

The data size is the total size of parts (1), (2), and (3), plus 4 bytes.

(3)(2)(1)

 Time

Appends the time the data was output. Appended data range: YYYYMMDDhhmmss

• Data format

YYYYMMDDhhmms : Read data

 Read detailed error code

Factors that caused read errors are judged for each burst number. The Read detailed error code is appended before the Read data.

Burst number 1

detailed error code

Burst number 2

detailed error code

:…:

Burst number n

detailed error code

Read data

n: Maximum value of the burst No.

• The detailed error code is appended starting with burst No. 1.

• The detailed error code is appended with the following contents.

Detailed error code Description

0 Reading success

1 No code

2 The set decode timeout period elapsed.

3 Scanning aborted.

9 Reading images failed.

 Code type

The type of read code can be appended before the read data.

Code type ID Read data

0 Reading error

1QR

2 DataMatrix

5 GS1 DataBar

6CODE39

7ITF

9 NW-7(Codabar)

10 JAN/EAN/UPC

11 CODE128

 Symbol ID

Appends the symbology identifier, specified by AIM, before the read data. It is not appended when a reading has failed.

• Data format

Symbol ID Read data

Code type Detail Symbol ID

QR : Model 1 ]Q0

DataMatrix : ECC 200 ]d1

CODE39 No check digit validation ]A0

ITF No check digit validation ]I0

NW-7(Codabar) ]F0

JAN/EAN/UPC UPC-A, UPC-E, JAN/EAN13 ]E0

CODE128 FNC1 not included. ]C0

GS1 Databar ]e0

: Model 2, ECI not applied ]Q1

: Model 2, ECI applied ]Q2

: Model 2, ECI not applied, FNC1 (1st) ]Q3

: Model 2, ECI applied, FNC1 (1st) ]Q4

: Model 2, ECI not applied, FNC1 (2nd) ]Q5

: Model 2, ECI applied, FNC1 (2nd) ]Q6

: ECC 200, FNC1 (1st) ]d2

: ECC 200, FNC1 (2nd) ]d3

: ECC 200, ECI applied ]d4

: ECC 200, ECI applied, FNC1 (1st) ]d5

: ECC 200, ECI applied, FNC1 (2nd) ]d6

Check digit is validated and transmitted. ]A1

Check digit is validated but not transmitted. ]A3

Check digit is validated and transmitted. ]I1

Check digit is validated but not transmitted. ]I3

JAN/EAN8 ]E4

UPC-A, UPC-E, JAN/EAN13 Addon 2, addon 5

FNC1 on the first digit (GS1-128). ]C1

FNC1 on the second digit. ]C2

]E3

 Parameter bank number

Appends the parameter bank number that was read. It is not appended when a reading fails.

• Data format

Read data : nn

nn = parameter bank number (01 - 10)

 Burst number

Outputs the burst number of the successfully read image in the burst read mode. No data is appended for a failed reading. This data is not appended in any mode other than the burst read mode.

• Data format

Read data : n

n = burst number (1 - 8)

 Scan count

Appends the number of reading attempts of the SR-750 Series while the timing input is turned ON. Failed reading operations are also counted.

• Data format

Read data : nnnnn

nnnnn = scan count (1 - 65535)

 Position level

Appends the position level of the read code. When several codes are read for one scan (multi read), the average of all code position levels is output. 0 is appended when a reading fails.

• Data format

Read data : level = n

n = position level value (0 - 5)

E SR-750 UM

Page 65

 Code vertex coordinates/Code center coordinates

Reference

Point

(751/0)

(751/479)

(0/479)

(0, 0)

X5, Y5

X1, Y1 X2, Y2

X4, Y4 X3, Y3

Code

(Field of view)

Appends the coordinates of the vertexes and center position of the read code.

• Data format

Code vertex coordinates

Code center coordinates :

: Read data : X1/Y1 : X2/Y2 : X3/Y3 : X4/Y4

Read data : X5/Y5

X1/Y1 to X4/Y4 : Code vertex coordinates (Xn = 0 - 751, Yn = 0 - 479) X5/Y5 : Code center coordinates (X5 = 0 - 751, Y5 = 0 - 479)

Coordinates are specified for code positions in an image as below:

Output of the code vertex coordinate when performing multiple reading of the same code. When multiple readings are performed for 1 scan, the coordinates are output in the following order:

• Coordinates with code center coordinates higher in the field of view (smaller in Y) are prioritized.

• If 2 coordinates have the same Y coordinates, the center coordinates of the code further to the left in the field of view (smaller in X) are prioritized.

Output format for multi read is as follows:

Read data 1, Read data 2,

… ,

Read data n

Read data 1 corner

coordinates:

Read data 2 corner

coordinates:

… :

Read data n corner

coordinates

Read data 1 center

coordinates:

Read data 2 center

coordinates:

… :

Read data n center

coordinates

If the code vertex coordinates are out of the decoding range, that value becomes "-1". (Reading is possible even if all the vertexes are not within the decoding range.)

 Unused ECC ratio

Appends the unused error correction ratio. The average value will be appended when several codes are read for 1 scan (multi read). It is not appended when a reading fails.

• Data format

Read data : nnn %

nnn = unused ECC ratio (0 - 100)

 Matching level

Appends the matching level value of the read code.

• Matching levels of each code will be appended for the multi read.

• Value is not appended when a reading fails.

• Data format

Read data : nnn

nnn = matching level value (0 - 100)

 Code quality verification result

Code quality verification results data can be appended. The data formats are shown as below.

Setting

ISO/IEC15415

ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-

2006)

SAE AS9132

Settings for Select expression of grades are not reflected.

SEMI T10-0701

Settings for Select expression of grades, Append detailed verification result and Append values are not reflected.

Append

grades

Alphabet NG NG Read data: C

Alphabet NG OK Read data: C (-)

Alphabet OK NG Read data: C/A/C/B/A/B/-/-/A/A/A/B/A

Alphabet OK OK

Numeric NG NG Read data: 2.0

Numeric NG OK Read data: 2.0(-)

Numeric OK NG Read data: 2.0/4.0/2.0/3.0/4.0/3.0/2.0

Numeric OK OK

Alphabet NG NG Read data: C

Alphabet NG OK Read data: C (-)

Alphabet OK NG Read data: C/A/C/B/A/B/-/-/A/A/A/B/A

Alphabet OK OK

Numeric NG NG Read data: 2.0

Numeric NG OK Read data: 2.0(-)

Numeric OK NG Read data: 2.0/4.0/2.0/3.0/4.0/3.0/2.0

Numeric OK OK

Append detailed

verification

Append

values

result

NG NG Read data: P

NG OK Read data: P(-)

OK NG Read data: F/P/P/F/P

OK OK

NG NG Read data: P

NG OK Read data: P(-)

OK NG Read data: F/P/P/F/P

OK OK

Data format example

Read data: C(-)/A(-)/A(0.733)/C(-)/C(-)/ B(-)/-(-)/-(-)/A(0.002)/A(0.002)/A(1.000)/ B(-0.646)/A(-0.289)

Read data: 2.0(-)/4.0(-)/2.0(0.632)/3.0(-)/

4.0(-)/3.0(0.072)/2.0(0.640)

Read data: C(-)/A(-)/A(0.733)/C(-)/C(-)/ B(-)/-(-)/-(-)/A(0.002)/A(0.002)/A(1.000)/ B(-0.646)/A(-0.289)

Read data: 2.0(-)/4.0(-)/2.0(0.632)/3.0(-)/

4.0(-)/3.0(0.072)/2.0(0.640)

Read data: F(-)/P(0.632)/P(-)/F(0.852)/ P(0.005)

Read data: 0.054/0.850/5.400/3.112

 Append order of verification results

Results of evaluation items for each verification are arranged in the following order.

Standards Evaluation item names (English)

Overall Total evaluation ALL

Decode

Symbol Contrast Symbol contrast SC

Modulation Modulation MOD

Reflectance Margin Reflectance margin RM

Fixed Pattern Damage

ISO/IEC 15415

Format Information Damage

Version Information Damage

Axial Nonuniformity Axial nonuniformity AN

Grid Nonuniformity Grid nonuniformity GN

Unused Error Correction

Print Growth Horizontal

Print Growth Vertical

Evaluation item

names (Japanese)

Decode success/ failure

Fixed pattern damage

Format information damage

Version information damage

Unused error correction

Print growth (horizontal)

Print growth (vertical)

Abbreviated

names

DEC

FPD

FID *1

VID *2

UEC

PGH

PGV

E SR-750 UM

Page 66

Standards Evaluation item names (English)

Read data : (no file)

Read data :(1)_(2)_(3)_(4). (5)

No saved image:

Image to save is present

• Data format

Header Read data + appended data

Checksum calculation range

cc Terminator

Overall Total evaluation ALL

Decode

Cell Contrast Cell contrast CC

Cell Modulation Cell modulation CM

Reflectance Margin Reflectance margin RM

Fixed Pattern Damage

ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-

2006)

SAE AS9132

SEMI T10-0701

Format Information Damage

Version Information Damage

Axial Nonuniformity Axial nonuniformity AN

Grid Nonuniformity Grid nonuniformity GN

Unused Error Correction

Print Growth Horizontal

Print Growth Vertical

Overall Total evaluation ALL

Quiet Zone Quiet zone QZ

Symbol Contrast Symbol contrast SC

Angular Distortion Angular distortion AD

Module Fill Module fill MF

Symbol Contrast Symbol contrast SC

Signal to Noise Ratio Signal to noise ratio SNR

Horizontal Mark Growth

Vertical Mark Growth Vertical mark growth VMG

DataMatrix Cell Width Average cell width DMCW

DataMatrix Cell Height Average cell height DMCH

Horizontal Mark Move

Vertical Mark Move

Cell Defects Cell defects CD

Finder Pattern Defects

Unused Error Correction

Evaluation item

names (Japanese)

Decode success/ failure

Fixed pattern damage

Format information damage

Version information damage

Unused error correction

Print growth (horizontal)

Print growth (vertical)

Horizontal mark growth

Horizontal misplacement

Ver tica l misplacement

Finder pattern defects

Unused error correction

Abbreviated

names

DEC

FPD

FID *1

VID *2

UEC

PGH

PGV

HMG

HMM

VMM

FPD

UEC1 *3

UEC2

UEC3

UEC4

UEC5

UEC6

UEC7

UEC8

UEC9

UEC10

*1 Enabled only for QR and micro QR code "-" is displayed for DataMatrix. *2 QR code Model 2 Version 7 and later versions are only enabled. "-" is displayed

for others.

*3 The number of items displayed for UEC, evaluation item for SEMI T10-0701

varies according to the code size.

 Image file name

Appends the saved image file name linked to the read data (including an extension). When no image is saved, "(no file)" is appended. When there is an image to save, the saved file name is appended.

(1) Image count value (3 bytes) IMG : When saved in ROM/RAM

000 to 999 : When sent via FTP

• The number is counted from 000 at startup.

• The counter value is incremented each time one image is sent.

• When the counter value of 999 is incremented, the value returns to

000.

(2) Image type (1 byte) S : OK image

L:Latest E : Error image W : Unstable image N : Comparison NG C : Captured image X : No decoding process

(3) Operation number (2 bytes) 00 : Latest

01 to 10 : From timing ON/OFF to specified

number

#1 to #8 : Burst number (4) Bank number (2 bytes) 01 to 10 (5) Image file extension ROM/RAM : bmp

FTP : bmp or jpg

*1 (no file) occupies 9 bytes. *2 When a reading error occurs, the data for the number of parameter banks

registered are appended.

 Group name (When the Master/Slave function is used)

Appends the group name to be set when using the Master/Slave function.

• Data format

Read data : Group name

Group name: Up to 16 characters

 Master/Slave ID

Appends the unit ID to be set when using the Master/Slave function.

• Data format

Read data : nn

nn: Unit ID (0 to 31)

 Read time

Appends the time required for the reading.

• Data format

Read data : nnnnn ms

nnnnn = reading time (1 - 65535)

 Checksum

The checksum is calculated using all characters that are not part of the header or the delimiter and is then appended immediately before the terminator with 2 characters. For calculation details, refer to "15-5 Checksum Calculation Method (Page

121)"

E SR-750 UM

Page 67

7-3 RS-232C Communication

Reference

Point

Read data

Response

STX

ACK

This section describes the RS-232C communication of the SR-750 Series.

RS-232C Communication Configuration

Before using the RS-232C communication, set the communication conditions for the SR-750 Series and the control device.

 SR-750 Series configuration

Use AutoID Network Navigator to configure the following:

• Communication conditions : Baud rate, data bit length, parity, and stop bit length

• Communication protocol : None, PASS/RTRY, or ACK/NAK

• Communication data format : Header and Terminator

Set the same settings for both the control device and the SR-750 Series.

 Default settings for RS-232C

The default settings for RS-232C are as follows.

• Baud rate : 115200 bps

• Data bit length : 8 bit

• Parity : Even

• Stop bit length : 1 bit

Press and hold the Test button for 6 seconds or longer to return the SR750 Series to the default configuration.

"3-1 Using the SR-750 Series (Page 9)"

Communication Protocol

RS-232C communication has 3 communication protocols available. Set it according to the usage.

No Handshaking

The SR-750 Series sends read data to the control device without handshaking.

z PASS and RTRY formats

PASS (RTRY ) or PASS ( RTRY )

ESC

* at the beginning and at the end can be added.

Important

• The SR-750 Series is able to receive any command while waiting for a response. This allows for a response to a command to be sent without delay.

• If the SR-750 Series receives a RESET command while waiting for a response, the send buffer will be cleared.

ETX

ACK/NAK

This protocol uses (0x06) instead of "PASS" and (0x15) instead of "RTRY" in the PASS/RTRY protocol. Other than the differences in the character strings to send, this protocol is identical to the PASS/RTRY protocol.

Point

If the SR-750 Series' send buffer is overloaded, reading operation will be stopped.

• When "ACK" is received, "OVER" is sent to the control device and an error occurs.

• When another "ACK" is received, the operation resumes.

NAK

 ACK/NAK formats

Send [ACK] (0x06) and [NAK] (0x15) only, but do not append header nor terminator.

Send Buffer Capacity

• The send buffer of the SR-750 Series can hold up to 10KB of data. The number of characters for each entry saved in the send buffer includes the header and terminator.

• When the number of characters in data exceeds 10KB, the send buffer overflows.

 Send Buffer Overflow

If the send buffer overflows, the SR-750 Series will send the following message and an error occurs.

• "E" and "4" are displayed alternately on the multiple LED.

• ERR BUSY is output. (when OUT terminal is specified)

• When PASS/RTRY or ACK/NAK is set and PASS or ACK is received, "OVER" is output.

PASS /RTRY

The SR-750 Series sends read data to the control device using the following protocol:

1 The SR-750 Series sends data to the control device.

2 The SR-750 Series waits for a response (PASS: Transmission

successful, RTRY: Request to resend) from the control device.

The SR-750 Series can still read codes while waiting for a response. Data read while waiting for a response from the computer will be stored in the send buffer.

3 The host computer sends one of the following responses to the SR-

750 Series.

• PASS: Transmission complete. (The device does not respond to PASS)

• RTRY: Resend the same data to the control device and wait for a PASS response.

If the SR-750 Series send buffer is overloaded, "E4" is displayed on the multi LED and reading operation is stopped.

• When "PASS" is received, "OVER" is sent to the control device and an error occurs.

• When another "PASS" is received, the operation resumes.

To resume from buffer overflowed status, try the following operations:

• Send the buffer clear command "BCLR" from the control device.

• When PASS/RTRY or ACK/NAK is set, send PASS or ACK again

* Send buffer also can be cleared with a "RESET" command or cycling power. * When a "BCLR" command is received while the send buffer is not overflowed,

data currently stored in the send buffer will be cleared.

E SR-750 UM

Page 68

7-4 Ethernet Communication

Reference

Pin number Not PoE PoE-TypeA PoE-TypeB

1 TX+ TX+/ V+ TX+

2 TX- TX-/ V+ TX-

3RX+RX+/ V-RX+

4 RX- RX-/ V- RX-

5 ―― V-

6 ―― V-

7 ―― V+

8 ―― V+

Signal name

TX+/ TX- Sent signal

RX+/ RX- Receive signal

V+/ V- PoE power source

Communication Function

Using the Ethernet communication, you can send data from the SR-750 Series, or send operating instructions or change settings from the control device. This section describes the basic specifications and functions of the SR-750 Series.

Basic Specifications

 Ethernet port specifications

The SR-750 Series supports PoE (Power over Ethernet). The pin arrangement of the Ethernet port on the SR-750 side is as follows:

• Pin arrangement of KEYENCE Ethernet cable

M12 Signal name RJ45 Wire color

1 TX+ 1 White/Orange

2 TX- 2 Orange

3 RX+ 3 White/Green

4RX-6Green

5V-7White/Brown

6V-8Brown

7V+5White/Blue

8V+4Blue

* When making a cable using the optional connector OP-87362, use a cable of

CAT5e or more.

Function Outline

Ethernet communication of the SR-750 Series is available with the following functions:

 Socket communication function

Sends read data of the SR-750 Series via socket communication. Control the behavior of the SR-750 or change the settings via Ethernet by sending operation and configuration commands to the command send/receive port. Communication protocol: TCP

 PLC link function (only for MELSEC and KV Series)

The PLC link is created via Ethernet. Compatible PLCs are MELSEC Series and KV Series. "9-1 PLC Link (Page

85)" Communication protocol: UDP

 PROFINET

The SR-750 Series can make PROFINET communication. For details, refer to "12-1 PROFINET (Page 109)". Communication protocol: PROFINET

 EtherNet/IP function

The SR-750 Series can be connected as an EtherNet/IP adaptor. For details, refer to "11-1 EtherNet/IP (Page 94)" Communication protocol: EtherNet/IP

 FTP function

The SR-750 Series operates as an FTP server or an FTP client and can transfer scanned image data or the setting file. Communication protocol: FTP

 Communication protocols for other functions

• Communication with Multimonitor: UDP

• Communication with FileView: FTP

• Master/Slave function: UDP

Port Numbers

Ethernet communication settings

 SR-750 Series settings

Use the AutoID Network Navigator to set the following settings:

• IP address

• Subnet mask

• Default gateway

 Ethernet default settings

The Ethernet default settings are as follows.

• IP address 192.168.100.100

• Subnet mask 255.255.255.0

• Default gateway 0.0.0.0

Pressing the TUNE button for at least 5 seconds sets the temporary IP address setting mode.

"3-1 Using the SR-750 Series (Page 9)"

E SR-750 UM

This section describes the port numbers available on the SR-750 Series.

Port Name

Command port

Data port 1

Data port 2 *3

FTP communication port

Communication

Method

Socket communication

PLC link communication

FTP communication

Listen port/

Remote Port

Listen port TCP 9004 *1 *2

Remote port TCP 1024 to 65535

Remote port

Communication

UDP

― FTP

Protocol

1024 to 65535

20: FTP data port

21: FTP service port

*1 9013, 9014, 9015, 5920, and 44818 cannot be set as they are reserved for the

reader system.

*2 When 9004 (initial value) is set, the command transmission/reception and the

data output occur at the same port. If you want to assign different ports to the command transmission/reception and the data output, change the port number.

*3 Data port 2 performs client operations only.

SR-750 Series

Port Number

(ACTIVE mode)

Page 69

7-5 Socket Communication

Send FTP connection request as necessary

7-6 FTP Communication

This section described the behavior and configuration items of the SR-750 Series to perform socket communication.

Command port

Use this port to send the operation/setting commands to the SR-750 Series via Ethernet. The command port supports server operations only. To send commands, establish a connection from the control device.

Server and Client Operations

Socket communication function of the data port supports both server and client operations. Socket communication function for PLC port is available for client operations only. Server operations and client operations can be selected using the IP address setting (Remote IP address setting) for Data port 1 and Data port 2.

 Setting the SR-750 Series for server operations only

*Data port 1 only

Set the IP address of the connection destination as follows.

IP address: 0.0.0.0

* Data port 2 does not function.

 Setting the SR-750 Series for server and client operations

Set the IP address of the connection destination as follows.

IP address: Other than 0.0.0.0

* Data port 2 performs client operations only.

Continually Send Connection Requests

When a connection is not established, "Continually Send Connection Requests" configuration determines the establish request timing.

Configuration Establish Request Timing

Continually Send

Connection Requests

No When read data is determined and data output is ready.

As necessary when a connection is not established such as

Yes

at power-on.

Keep Alive Function

This function checks whether the connection established with a remote device is still alive.

 Operating conditions

Operates when the status of no communication continues for 60 seconds or more.

 Operation details

Sends a Keep packet to the remote device and checks the response.

• Response: Keep the connection established.

• No response: Disconnect the connection.

The SR-750 Series operates as FTP client or FTP server and can transfer scanned images. This section describes operations for FTP communication.

FTP Communication Settings

 FTP client operations/FTP server operations settings

Select FTP client operations or FTP server operations from the IP address setting for the FTP transmission setting.

• Setting the SR-750 Series for FTP server operations only IP address: 0.0.0.0

• Setting the SR-750 Series for FTP server and FTP client operations IP address: Other than 0.0.0.0

FTP Client Function

 User name and password

Set the user name and pass word for FTP communication.

• User name : ASCII 16 characters or less (Default setting: admin)

• Password : ASCII 16 characters or less (Default setting: admin)

 Image file

The following settings can be made for files sent from the SR-750 Series to FTP server.

• Specified format : Bitmap, JPEG

• JPEG image quality : 1 to 10

• Binning : None, 1/4, 1/16, 1/64

 Image file name

When the unit operates as FTP client, file names vary depending on the edit image file name function status (Enable or Disable).

• Edit image file name function: Disable

File name : (1) _ (2) _ (3) _ (4) . (5)

(1) Image count value (3 bytes) 000 to 999

• The number is counted from 000 at startup.

• The counter value is incremented each time one image is sent.

• When the counter value of 999 is incremented, the value returns to

000.

(2) Image type (1 byte) S : OK image

L:Latest E : Error image W : Unstable image N : Comparison NG C : Captured image X : No decoding process

(3) Operation number (2 bytes) 00 : Latest

01 to 10 : From timing ON/OFF to specified

number

#1 to #8 : Burst number (4) Bank number (2 bytes) 01 to 10 (5) Image file extension bmp or jpg

• Edit image file name function: Enable

Operates when the edit of image file name by script is enabled. Outputs data using the image file name edited by script.

 Send FTP connection request as necessary

The connection request transmission timing for FTP server can be specified.

• : No : Send when the image transfer is confirmed and

the image file output preparation is complete.

Yes : Send as necessary when FTP connection is not

established, such as when the power is turned on.

E SR-750 UM

Page 70

 Send NOOP command

When Send NOOP Command configuration is enabled, NOOP commands are sent periodically with the specified transmission interval. Timeout disconnection of the FTP server at the connection destination can be avoided.

• Send NOOP command : Yes, No

• NOOP command transmission interval : 1 to 10 (in units of 1 minute)

 Send PASV command

When Send PASV Command configuration is enabled, PASV commands are sent at the file transmission timing to the FTP server.

• PASV command transmission interval : Yes, No

 Image transmission timing

The image transmission timing from the SR-750 Series is when the reading operation is complete.

• TRG BUSY signal is output during image transmission.

• Next reading operation cannot be started during image transmission.

FTP Server Function

 FTP Server Operation

• No. of connections which can be established simultaneously: max. 2 connections

• Operates as Anonymous FTP Server.

• When there is no connection from FTP client for 60 seconds, FTP connection is cut.

• The SR-750 Series is not equipped with the function to retain time in the main unit. Therefore, the update time is fixed (Jan 01 2000). Connecting to the SNTP server updates the time data.

 Files

The files treated as FTP server are the following 3 files.

• Setting file : Setting file of the SR-750 Series main unit (Extension: ptc)

• Image file : Image file obtained with the SR-750 Series (Extension: bmp)

• Script file : Script file set for the SR-750 Series (Extension: Lua)

• Name the setting file "config.ptc" and send.

• Name the script file "Fmtset.lua" and send.

NOTICE

• File names other than the above cannot be used.

 Image file name

The file name is as follows when operating as FTP server.

File name : (1) _ (2) _ (3) _ (4) . (5)

(1) Image count value (3 bytes) IMG : When saved in ROM/RAM (2) Image type (1 byte) S : OK image

(3) Operation number (2 bytes) 00 : Latest

(4) Bank number (2 bytes) 01 to 10 (5) Image file extension bmp

L : Latest E : Error image W : Unstable image N : Comparison NG C : Captured image X : No decoding process

01 to 10 : From timing ON/OFF to specified

number

#1 to #8 : Burst number

E SR-750 UM

Page 71

8-1 Details of Command

Important

TEST TUNE

SR-625

POWERR

NET IN

STB

OK/NG/

Command

Response

TEST TUNE

SR-625

POWERR

NET IN

STB

OK/NG/

(1) S

end a Trigger input ON command

LON

(2)

Response for the Trigger input ON command

OK, LON

(4) Read result data

(Code data)

(3) Reading

operations

Command Response

Command

ESC

Header

Command

Terminator

Header

Command,Parameter 1

Ter m in a to r

Header

Command,Parameter 1,Parameter 2

Terminator

Header OK ,

Send command

Terminator

Header ER ,

Send command

, Error code Terminator

Communication

This section describes the command types and communication format of the SR750 Series.

 Send command format

Up to 2 parameters for each operation and configuration command are available. Commands are sent in the following format according to the number of parameters:

Number of

Parameters

None

Send Command Format

Types of Command Communication

There are 2 types of commands used with the SR-750 Series: These commands and responses are common to RS-232C communication and Ethernet communication. The ASCII codes are used for the transmission and reception.

 Operation commands

Commands to control the SR-750 Series operations.

 Configuration commands

Commands to change or confirm the SR-750 Series configuration.

Command Communication Process

Command communication with the SR-750 Series is performed as follows:

1 The host PC sends commands (operation/configuration commands)

to the SR-750 Series.

2 SR-750 sends responses for the commands received.

Read result data etc. will be sent after the response for an operation command is sent. [Example] Read result data when a timing ON command is used

Command Communication Format

 Header and Terminator

There are two types of header and terminator for the SR-750 Series. Use either of them.

Header Terminator

None CR

STX ETX

Responses are sent with the same header and terminator of the corresponding send command.

STX

LF LF

* is appended at the end of the command. However, will not be added to

ETX STX

the response.

Response

ETX

 Response format

Responses for operation or configuration commands are sent in the following format:

Send Command

Result

Successful

Failed

Send Command Format

 Response error codes

Error code Error Description

00 Undefined command received

01 Mismatched command format

02 The parameter 1 value exceeds the set value

03 The parameter 2 value exceeds the set value

04 The parameter 2 is not set in HEX (hexadecimal) code.

05 The parameter 2 set in HEX (hexadecimal) code but exceeds the set value

10 There are 2 or more ! marks in the preset data

11 The area specified data is invalid.

12 Specified data does not exist.

13 mm of %Tmm-*** exceeds 31.

14 There is no correct response to the %Tmm-KEYENCE command.

20 This command not executable in the current status was received

21 The buffer has overflowed, so commands cannot be executed

22 An error occurred while loading or saving parameters,

23 Command cannot be executed while connecting with the setup software

30 No error image was saved to this number

35 There are no settings for this read code

40 The length of the command sent as a batch exceed 2048 bytes

41 The length of the command sent as a batch exceed 2048 bytes

42 A command not allowed in batch settings has been specified

99 Other errors (Contact your nearest KEYENCE sales office.)

(Invalid number of parameters)

The preset data is incorrect

(Execution error)

so commands cannot be executed

8-2 Operation Commands

This section describes the details of the operation commands of the SR-750 Series.

Reading Operation Control

 Timing ON command

Send command Normal mode LON

Response Normal process OK, LON

Bank settings LON, bb or LONbb bb:

parameter bank number (01 - 10)

Abnormal process ER, LON, ee ee: Error code

• If is appended at the beginning of the command, the will clear the receive buffer of the SR-D750 Series. If unnecessary characters appear in the receive buffer of the SR750 Series, append at the command communication.

• Set the character interval to 10 seconds or less when sending commands to the SR-750 Series. If 10 seconds or more elapse, the SR-750 Series will delete all received characters from the buffer.

ESC

E SR-750 UM

Page 72

 Timing OFF command

Send command LOFF Response Normal process OK, LOFF

Abnormal process ER, LOFF, ee ee: Error code

 Finishing quick setup code reading

Send command RCOFF Response Normal process OK, RCOFF

Abnormal process ER, RCOFF, ee ee: Error code

• Starts and finishes reading operations of the SR-750 Series. Same operations as the timing ON/OFF signals from the IN terminal.

• Timing ON/OFF commands can be changed, up to 8 characters. When sending the trigger input command with the parameter bank number added, the data is read only with the specified parameter bank.

• Response is output upon receiving a send command.

• When a code reading was successful while the SR-750 Series is in the Single reading mode and the data transmission is set to Send after read, do not send a timing OFF command. The response indicating the abnormal process is output.

• When a code cannot be read and the trigger input OFF command is sent, a reading error is output after response.

• Timing OFF command cannot finish reading when the reading was started with the IN terminal or the Test switch.

• An error code is output when a timing ON command is received again during the reading with a timing ON command. (Same for timing OFF commands)

• If Specify response character is set to "SR-600 compatible", response is not sent.

• If Specify response character is set to "User setting", the response command will have the same character string as the one set for Success response character and Failure response character.

"3-9 SR-600 Compatible Output Mode (Page 19)"

Preset Data Registration

 Starting preset data registration

Send command PRON Response Normal process OK, PRON

• These are used to register preset data for the SR-750 Series.

• When the preset data registration is completed, SR-750 outputs data in the following format:

PR00 :

Abnormal process ER, PRON, ee ee: Error code

Preset registered data

 Finishing preset data registration

Send command PROFF Response Normal process OK, PROFF

• These are used to finish or stop preset registration for the SR-750 Series.

• After the SR-750 Series outputs preset registered data, do not send a PROFF command.

• When a PROFF command is sent to stop a preset registration, the following error code will be output after the response:

PR01 : Read error

• If Specify response character is set to "SR-600 compatible", response is not sent.

"3-9 SR-600 Compatible Output Mode (Page 19)"

Abnormal process ER, PROFF, ee ee: Error code

Reading Quick Setup Codes

 Starting quick setup code reading

Send command RCON Response Normal process OK, RCON

• When a reading operation started and all quick setup codes were read, the configuration will be saved in the ROM and applied to the operations. Communication settings are also applied. * Same for the quick setup code reading executed by the TUNE switch.

• If Specify response character is set to "SR-600 compatible", OK is returned for normal process and ERRee is returned for abnormal process.

"3-9 SR-600 Compatible Output Mode (Page 19)"

Abnormal process ER, RCON, ee ee: Error code

• Finishes reading when a quick setup code reading is not completed.

• When the SR-600 compatible output mode is "Enabled", OK and ERRee are returned for normal process and abnormal process respectively.

"3-9 SR-600 Compatible Output Mode (Page 19)"

 Quick setup code status check

Send command RCCHK Response Normal process OK = RCCHK = mm…

Abnormal process ER, RCCHK, ee ee: Error code

• Checks the quick setup code reading status.

mm = OK :

READING : Reading quick setup code NG : Quick setup code reading failed NONE :

Quick setup code reading successful

Quick setup code reading not executed

Test Mode Control

 Starting reading rate test mode

Offline mode Send command Normal mode TEST1

Response Normal process OK, TEST1

Online mode Send command Normal mode #TEST1

Response Normal process OK, #TEST1

Bank settings TEST1bb or TEST1, bb bb: parameter bank number (01 - 10)

Abnormal process ER, TEST1, ee ee: Error code

Bank settings #TEST1bb or #TEST1, bb bb: parameter bank number (01 - 10)

Abnormal process ER, #TEST1, ee ee: Error code

 Starting read time test mode

Offline mode Send command Normal mode TEST2

Response Normal process OK, TEST2

Online mode Send command Normal mode #TEST2

Response Normal process OK, #TEST2

Bank settings TEST2bb or TEST2, bb bb: parameter bank number (01 - 10)

Abnormal process ER, TEST2, ee ee: Error code

Bank settings #TEST2bb or #TEST2, bb bb: parameter bank number (01 - 10)

Abnormal process ER, #TEST2, ee ee: Error code

 Starting code position test mode

Offline mode Send command Normal mode TEST3

Response Normal process OK, TEST3

Bank settings TEST3bb or TEST3, bb bb: parameter bank number (01 - 10)

Abnormal process ER, TEST3, ee ee: Error code

 Finishing test mode

Offline mode Send command Normal mode QUIT

Online mode Send command Normal mode #QUIT

• This outputs the results of each test after a response.

• When a parameter bank number is appended at the end of the code, the test is

• To finish the test mode, make sure to send an end command.

• The code position test mode is used only in offline mode.

• If Specify response character is set to "SR-600 compatible", OK is returned for

Response Normal process OK, QUIT

Abnormal process ER, QUIT, ee ee: Error code

Response Normal process OK, #QUIT

Abnormal process ER, #QUIT, ee ee: Error code

executed only for the specified parameter bank.

normal process and ERRee is returned for abnormal process.

"3-9 SR-600 Compatible Output Mode (Page 19)"

E SR-750 UM

Page 73

I/O Terminal Control

Confirming the Read History

 Input terminal status check

Send command INCHK, m Response Normal process OK, INCHK, n..

m = 1 - 2: Terminal number n = OFF (input terminal OFF), ON (input terminal ON)

Abnormal process ER, INCHK, ee ee: Error code

• Checks the input terminal status.

• If Specify response character is set to "SR-600 compatible", n(ON/OFF) is returned for normal process and ERRee is returned for abnormal process.

"3-9 SR-600 Compatible Output Mode (Page 19)"

 Output terminal ON control (individual control)

Send command OUTON, m Response Normal process OK, OUTON

m = 1 - 3: Terminal number

Abnormal process ER, OUTON, ee ee: Error code

• Controls the output terminal ON operations individually.

 Output terminal OFF control (individual control)

Send command OUTOFF, m Response Normal process OK, OUTOFF

m = 1 - 3: Terminal number

Abnormal process ER, OUTOFF, ee ee: Error code

• Controls the output terminal OFF operations individually.

 Output terminal ON control (batch control)

Send command ALLON Response Normal process OK, ALLON

Abnormal process ER, ALLON, ee ee: Error code

• Controls all output terminal ON operations.

 Output terminal OFF control (batch control)

Send command ALLOFF Response Normal process OK, ALLOFF

Abnormal process ER, ALLOFF, ee ee: Error code

• Controls all output terminal OFF operations.

* If Specify response character is set to "SR-600 compatible" with the output

terminal control, OK is returned for normal process and ERRee is returned for abnormal process.

"3-9 SR-600 Compatible Output Mode (Page 19)"

Soft Reset of the SR-750 Series

Resets the SR-750 Series using a command to the condition at power-on without actually turning off the power.

Send command RESET Response OK, RESET

• The SR-750 Series is reset after outputting a response.

• If Specify response character is set to "SR-600 compatible", OK is returned.

Clearing the Send Buffer

All data in the send buffer of the SR-750 Series is deleted.

Send command BCLR Response OK, BCLR

• If Specify response character is set to "SR-600 compatible", OK is returned.

"3-9 SR-600 Compatible Output Mode (Page 19)"

 Read OK/error count history

Send command NUM Response Normal process OK, NUM, aaaaa, bbbbb, ccccc, ddddd, eeeee

Abnormal process ER, NUM, ee ee: Error code

• Checks the Read (comparison) OK count etc. since the unit was turned on.

• Turning the power off or sending a RESET command will reset the read history.

• This history does not include a count of OK/NG/ERR/TIMING results obtained when registering preset data.

• If Specify response character is set to "SR-600 compatible", ERRee is returned for abnormal process.

"3-9 SR-600 Compatible Output Mode (Page 19)"

aaaaa = 00000 - 65535 : bbbbb = 00000 - 65535 : Comparison NG count ccccc = 00000 - 65535 : Read error count ddddd = 00000 - 65535 : Stable reading count eeeee = 00000 - 65535 : Trigger input count

Read (comparison) OK count

 Bank count history

Send command NUMB Response OK, NUMB, BANK1, BANK2, · · ·BANK9, BANK10, TIMING

BANKn = Read OK count in BANKn: 0 to 4294967295 TIMING = Timing input count: 0 to 4294967295

• The count is reset at the following timings.

• When the RESET command is received

• At power OFF

• When the TIMING count value reaches the limit and returns to 0, the bank count value is reset.

• Histories of unregistered banks are also output.

Image Scanning Control

 Capture execution

Send command SHOT, bb bb: p Response Normal process OK, SHOT, IMG_C_00_bb.(1)

(1) Extension (bmp or jpeg This is fixed to bmp

when saving into RAM.)

Abnormal process ER, SHOT, ee ee: Error code

• Scans only once with the specified parameter bank.

arameter bank number (01 - 10)

Forced Control of Reading and Scanning Operations

 Forced finishing of reading and scanning operations

Send command CANCEL Response Normal process OK, CANCEL

• Command to force to finish of the running scanning operation (also reading operation).

• When a CANCEL command is received during a start read command operation, the SR-750 Series does not output a read error code.

Abnormal process ER, CANCEL, ee ee: Error code

 Forced trigger lock

Send command LOCK Response Normal process OK, LOCK

• All reading and scanning operations are forced to stop.

• Until the trigger lock is released, reading and scanning operations cannot be executed.

• Turning the power off or using the RESET command can also cancel the forced lock.

Abnormal process ER, LOCK, ee ee: Error code

E SR-750 UM

Page 74

 Forced trigger lock release

Send command UNLOCK Response Normal process OK, UNLOCK

• Releases trigger lock.

Abnormal process ER, UNLOCK, ee ee: Error code

 Obtaining forced trigger lock status

Send command RLOCK Response OK, RLOCK, nnnn

nnnn = forced trigger lock status "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" is added.

Laser Pointer Control

The laser pointer for confirming a code position lights up or lights off using a command.

 Laser Pointer ON

Send command LDON Response Normal process OK, LDON

Abnormal process ER, LDON, ee ee: Error code

 Laser Pointer OFF

Send command LDOFF Response Normal process OK, LDOFF

Abnormal process ER, LDOFF, ee ee: Error code

Tuning

 Starting tuning

Send command TUNE, bb Response OK, TUNE bb = 01 to 10: Reading bank number: 1 to 10

When tuning operation is complete, the result is output in the following formats.

Success : Tuning SUCCEEDED,Tms,00000x00 Failure : Tuning FAILED,Tms,00000x0y

Tms: Tuning time x: Advice 0,1,2,4 0: No advice

y: Failure factor 1,2 1: Code detection impossible

• Tuning process starts.

• When tuning is successful, the result is saved to the specified bank (also saved to the ROM).

1: Filter process change may be enabled. 2: Installation condition, lighting condition or marking

condition adjustments should be considered.

4: Brightness may be insufficient.

2: Unstable reading

 Finishing tuning

Send command TQUIT Response OK, TQUIT

• Tuning process finishes.

 Obtaining the alternate order

Send command BANKORDER Response Normal process OK, BANKORDER, bb/bb/bb/· · ·

Abnormal process

• The parameter bank numbers to alternate are returned in turn.

• The parameter bank numbers are returned with the number of parameter bank numbers registered with the SR-750 Series. (max. 16)

• If there is no parameter bank number to alternate, an error is returned.

• If Specify response character is set to "SR-600 compatible", bb/bb/bb· · · is returned for normal process and ERRee is returned for abnormal process.

"3-9 SR-600 Compatible Output Mode (Page 19)"

bb: parameter bank number (01 - 10) ER, BANKORDER, ee

ee: Error code

 Initializing the parameter bank

Send command BANKCLR, bb bb:

Response Normal process OK, BANKCLR

Abnormal process ER, BANKCLR, ee ee: Error code

• If Specify response character is set to "SR-600 compatible", OK is returned for normal process and ERRee is returned for abnormal process.

"3-9 SR-600 Compatible Output Mode (Page 19)"

parameter bank number (00 - 10)

00 =

Initialize all parameter banks 01 - 10 = Initialize specified parameter banks only

Other Commands

 Save settings

Send command SAVE Response Normal process OK, SAVE

• The SAVE command is sent to save in the memory the setting contents sent to the SR-750 Series.

• The command setting is applied after the response of the SAVE command is sent.

Abnormal process ER, SAVE, ee ee: Error code

 Obtaining configuration command status

Send command CMDSTAT Response OK, CMDSTAT, nnnn

• Command to obtain configuration change status. This is used to check the process status of a configuration command such as WN, WP, and WB.

• If Specify response character is set to "SR-600 compatible", nnnn is returned.

"3-9 SR-600 Compatible Output Mode (Page 19)"

nnnn = none : No operation

wait : Wait for the setting applied update : Program updating

 Setting initialization

Send command DFLT Response Normal process OK, DFLT

• Resets the SR-750 Series to the default configuration.

• When the SR-600 compatible output mode is "Enabled", OK and ERRee are returned for normal process and abnormal process respectively.

"3-9 SR-600 Compatible Output Mode (Page 19)"

Abnormal process ER, DFLT, ee ee: Error code

When executing the script file - status confirmation command

 Obtaining the script processing time

Send command SCPTIME Response OK, SCPTIME, now=AAus, max=BBus, min=CCus

• Returns the processing time of script executed after power ON.

AA: Returns the most recent script processing time. BB: Returns the maximum value of the processing time. CC: Returns the minimum value of the processing time.

 Script debug setting

Send command SCPDBG, n Response OK, SCPDBG

• Sets whether to output debug from the script file to the command port or not.

• Setting the debug ON executes print(str) and outputs data.

n=0: Script debug OFF n=1: Script debug ON

 Obtaining the script error results

Send command SCPERR Response OK, SCPERR, mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm

mm… : Script error character string

E SR-750 UM

• Returns the details of script error.

Page 75

 Obtaining the script version

NOTICE

WB , bb mmm , nnn…

OK , WB

ER , WB , ee ee: Error code

RB , bb mmm

OK , RB , nnn…

ER , RB , ee ee: Error code

Send command SCPVER Response OK, SCPVER, mmmm, nnnn

mm...:Script library version nn…: FmtSet.lua version (Only when FmtSet.lua exists and the version

is defined)

8-3 Details of Configuration

Commands

This section describes the configuration commands of the SR-750 Series.

• FmtSet.Lua version is the value stored in variable name "SCPVERSION" within the FmtSet.Lua file.

• This returns the script library version and the FmtSet.lua version.

• If the script library does not exist, the error code 12 is returned. * The script library is a library file to use the edit data function and the edit image

file name function.

 Obtaining MAC address

Send command EMAC Response OK, EMAC, nnnn

• Read the MAC address of the SR-750 Series.

nnnn = MAC address (12 bytes)

 Obtaining error status

Send command ERRSTAT Response OK, ERRSTAT, nnnn

• Obtains the error status of the SR-750 Series itself. If multiple errors occur, items are displayed one by one in the above order.

• When the error status is cleared, it resets to the no error status automatically.

• If Specify response character is set to "SR-600 compatible", nnnn is returned.

"3-9 SR-600 Compatible Output Mode (Page 19)"

nnnn = none : No error

system : System error update : Program update error cfg : Set value error ip : IP address duplication error over : Send buffer overflow plc : PLC link error profinet : PROFINET error lua : Script error

 Clearing PLC link error

Send command PCLR Response OK, PCLR

• Clear the PLC link error.

 Erasing error images

Send command ICLR, bb bb:

Response Normal process OK, ICLR

Abnormal process ER, ICLR, ee ee: Error code

• Read error images that have been saved to the SR-750 Series are erased.

• Images that have been saved onto RAM or ROM are erased.

• With bb = 00, the most recent image is erased in the burst read mode.

• When the specified number of images is set in the image saving mode, all images are erased with 00 set. If other values are sent, an error is returned.

• If Specify response character is set to "SR-600 compatible", OK is returned for normal process and ERRee is returned for abnormal process.

"3-9 SR-600 Compatible Output Mode (Page 19)"

parameter bank number (00 - 10) 00 = The most recent image is deleted 01 - 10 = Erasing error images of the specified parameter banks only

 Confirming type of model and main unit system version

Send command KEYENCE Response OK, KEYENCE, SR-750, aaaaa aaaaa:

Main unit system version

Types of Configuration Commands

The SR-750 Series setting commands include the following 5 types.

 Parameter bank configuration command (WB/RB)

Command to set scan and code configuration to a parameter bank. Changed configuration details are applied after a response for a configuration command is sent.

 Code configuration command for tuning (WC/RC)

Command to set codes for auto tuning. Up to 8 types of codes selected during auto tuning can be registered. Changed configuration details are applied when a response for a configuration command is sent.

 Operation configuration command (WP/RP)

Command to set items related to the SR-750 Series operations. Changed configuration details are applied after a response for a configuration command is sent.

 Communication configuration command (WN/RN)

Command to set items related to RS-232C and Ethernet communications. Changed configuration details are applied after a SAVE command is received.

 Batch transmission of configuration/confirmation

commands (WA/RA)

The dedicated command has been prepared for batch transmission of multiple configuration/confirmation commands. Use this command to reduce the number of times to send configuration/ confirmation commands.

• Send the SAVE command to save in the memory the contents changed by setting commands. If you do not send the SAVE command, when the power is turned off or the RESET command is received, the settings will return to the state before changed.

• The setting contents sent during the SR-750 operation are reflected when the current operation finishes, not after the response is sent to the command.

Details of Each Configuration Command

Parameter Bank Configuration Command Format (WB/ RB)

Parameter bank configuration command is sent in the following format:

• Configuration change Send command

Response Normal process

Abnormal process

• Configuration confirmation

Send command

Response Normal process

Abnormal process

bb : Parameter bank number 01 - 10 Fixed to 2 bytes mmm : Command number Fixed to 3 bytes nnn… : Setting value (varies according to command number)

example) Setting the Exposure of the parameter bank 1 to 300 μs.

Configuration change Send command WB, 01100, 0010

Scan condition setting OK, WB

Configuration confirmation Send command RB, 01100

Response (Normal process) OK, RB, 0010

E SR-750 UM

Page 76

 Scan condition setting

Command

Number

000

004

100

101

102

103

104

200

201

202

203

210

211

212

213

Lighting

Scanning

Filter setting

Function

Internal lighting use

External lighting use

Exposure

Dynamic range

Offset

Dynamic range

Analog gain

1st filter type

2nd filter type

3rd filter type

4th filter type

1st filter count

2nd filter count

3rd filter count

4th filter count

 Code setting

Function

Code type 300

Codes to read 301

Allow reduced detection count

Maximum read length 303

Minimum read length 304

Output length limitation 306

Direction of output 307

Length of output 308

Starting index of output 309

Spec ifyin g QR Model 1 Code Version

Specifying QR Model 2 Code version

Setting

(1 to 20)

QR code

Specifying

reading

QR Model 2

version

Code version (21 to 40)

Spec ifyin g MicroQR Code Version (M1 to M4)

Command

Number

302

400

401

402

403

Setting

value

0, 1

0003 to 0333

2500 to 37500

000 to 255

0 to 2

10000 to 40000

to 7Specify with count 1

Setting

value

1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11

01 to 16

0, 1

1 to 7089

0, 1

1 to 7089

0000 to 3FFF

00000 to FFFFF

0 to F

Explanation Default

0:Not used 1:Used

Exposure time = setting value × 30μs

Specify in units of 2500 10000

Use the default value of 255 for normal use.

0 : Hi-Sensitive 1 : Hi-SNR 2 : Hi-DR

Specify in units of 625 for the range from 10000 to 20000 Specify in units of 1250 for the range from 20000 to 40000

0 : Disable 1:Equalize 2:Expand 3:Shrink 4:Open 5 : Close 6:Median 7 : Unsharp Mask

Explanation Default

1:QR 2 : DataMatrix 5:GS1 DataBar 6 : CODE39 7:ITF

9 : NW-7 (Codebar) 10 : JAN/EAN/UPC 11 : CO DE1 28

0 : Do not allow 1 : Allow

0 : Disable 1:Enable

0:Forward 1 : Backward

Specifies version 1 to 14 with bit assign and set with HEX.

Specifies version 1 to 20 with bit assign and set with HEX.

Specifies version 21 to 40 with bit assign and set with HEX.

Specifies version M1 to M4 with bit assign and set with HEX.

0003

255

10000

7089

3FFF

FFFFF

Function

Specifying the reading target size of DataMatrix code

GS1 DataBar settings

CODE39 settings

ITF settings

NW-7 (Codabar) settings

Command

Number

410

390

391

392

393

394

395

396

375

376

377

379

385

386

380

381

382

383

384

Setting

value

Specifies the code size of DataMatrix code with bit assign and set with HEX. Square 1st bit: 10x10 13th bit: 44x44 2nd bit: 12x12 14th bit: 48x48 3rd bit: 14x14 15th bit: 52x52 4th bit: 16x16 16th bit: 64x64 5th bit: 18x18 17th bit: 72x72 6th bit: 20x20 18th bit: 80x80 7th bit: 22x22 19th bit: 88x88

0000000 to

8th bit: 24x24 20th bit: 96x96

3FFFFFFF

9th bit: 26x26 21st bit: 104x104 10th bit: 32x32 22nd bit: 120x120 11th bit: 36x36 23rd bit: 132x132 12th bit: 40x40 24th bit: 144x144

Rectangle 25th bit: 8x18 26th bit: 8x32 27th bit: 12x26 28th bit: 12x36 29th bit: 16x36 30th bit: 16x48

GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional/ Truncated

0,1

2 to 11

0,1

0 to 6

0 : Disable 1:Enable

GS1 DataBar Stacked/ StackedOmnidirectional

0 : Disable 1:Enable

GS1 DataBar Limited

0 : Disable 1:Enable

GS1 DataBar Expanded

0 : Disable 1:Enable

GS1 DataBar ExpandedStacked

0 : Disable 1:Enable

GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked (Number of rows) minimum

GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked (Number of rows) maximum

Send start/stop characters

0 : Disable 1:Enable

Inspect check-digit

0 : Disable 1:Enable

Send check-digit

0 : Disable 1:Enable

Full ASCII conversion

0 : Disable 1:Enable

Inspect check-digit

0 : Disable 1:Enable

Send check-digit

0 : Disable 1:Enable

Send start/stop characters

0 : Disable 1:Enable

Send start/stop characters letter type

0 : as lowercase 1 : as UPPERCASE

Inspect check-digit

0 : Disable 1:Enable

Send check-digit

0 : Disable 1:Enable

Check-digit type

0 : Modulus 16 1:Modulus 11 2 : Modulus 10/Weight 2 3 : Modulus 10/Weight 3 4 : Check DR 5 : Modulus 11-A 6:Luhn

Explanation Default

3FFFFFFF

E SR-750 UM

Page 77

Command

WC , mmmm , nnn…

OK , WC

ER , WC , ee ee: Error code

RC , mmmm

OK , RC , nnn…

ER , RC , ee ee: Error code

Function

JAN/EAN/UPC settings

CODE128 settings 366

Number

350

351

352

353

354

355

356

357

358

Setting

value

0,1

 Reading operation setting

Command

Function

Alternate 600

Internal bank retry count

Decode timeout duration

Scan delay time 603

Decoding area 604

Inverse 605

Reverse 606

Base tilt angle 607

Tilt angle range 608

Grid correction 500

Quiet zone scale factor 611

Number

601

602

Setting

value

0, 1

00 to 32

0001 to 0255

000 to 255

aaabbbcccddd

0, 1

0 to 359

0 to 180

0,1

Other than GS1 DataBar: 4 to 11 GS1 DataBar: 0 to 11

Explanation Default

UPC-E reading

0 : Disable 1:Enable

EAN/JAN 8 digits reading

0 : Disable 1:Enable

EAN/JAN 13 digits reading

0 : Disable 1:Enable

UPC-A Output

0 : Output in 13 digits 1 : Output in 12 digits

Add "number system" to UPC-E

0 : Disable 1:Enable

2-digit supplemental

0 : Disable 1:Enable

5-digit supplemental

0 : Disable 1:Enable

Ignore UPC without supplemental

0 : Disable 1:Enable

GTIN compatible 14-digit output

0 : Disable 1:Enable

GS1-128

0 : Disable 1:Enable

Explanation Default

0 : Disable 1:Enable

Specify in units of 10 ms 0010

Specify in units of 1 ms 000

aaa : 000 to 650 (Even only) bbb : 000 to 378 (Even only) ccc : 101 to 751 (Odd only) ddd : 101 to 479 (Odd only) * The minimum size is 100 dots ×

100 dots.

(aaa, bbb)

(ccc, ddd)

0 : Disable 1:Enable

Unit: 1 degree 0

Unit: 1 degree * Base tilt angle ± Tilt angle range

will be enabled.

0 : Disable 1:Enable

Quiet zone scale factor (x 1) *Barcode only

• Other than GS1 DataBar: Applied to the quiet zones at both ends

• GS1 DataBar: Applied to the right quiet zone of DataBar Limited

000000751479

180

Depends

on the

code type.

Format of the Code Setting Command for Tuning (WC/RC)

Send the code setting command for tuning in the following formats.

• Configuration change Send command

Response Normal process

Abnormal process

• Configuration confirmation

Send command

Response Normal process

Abnormal process

mm : Command number 2-byte fixed nnn : Setting value (changeable according to the command number)

example) Setting the maximum read length to 1000 digits

Configuration change Send command WC, 0100, 1000

Response (Normal process) OK, WC

Configuration confirmation Send command RC, 0100

Response (Normal process) OK, RC, 1000

 Tuning target code settings

Function

QR code settings

DataMatrix code settings

GS1 DataBar settings

CODE39 settings

ITF settings

Command

Setting

Number

value

0001 to

0100

7089

0001 to

0101

7089

0001 to

0200

3116

0001 to

0201

3116

0500 01 to 77 Maximum read length 77

0501 01 to 77 Minimum read length 1

0502 0 to 11

0503 0,1

0504 0,1

0505 0,1

0506 0,1

0507 0,1

0508 2 to 11

0509 2 to 11

0600 03 to 50 Maximum read length 50

0601 03 to 50 Minimum read length 3

0602 4 to 11 Quiet zone scale factor 7

0603 0,1

0604 0,1

0605 0,1

0607 0,1

0700 02 to 50 Maximum read length 50

0701 02 to 50 Minimum read length 6

0702 4 to 11 Quiet zone scale factor 7

0703 0,1

0704 0,1

Explanation Default

Maximum read length 7089

Minimum read length 1

Maximum read length 3116

Minimum read length 1

GS1 DataBar Limited Right quiet zone scale factor setting

GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional/ Truncated

0 : Disable 1:Enable

GS1 DataBar Stacked/ StackedOmnidirectional

0 : Disable 1:Enable

GS1 DataBar Limited

0 : Disable 1:Enable

GS1 DataBar Expanded

0 : Disable 1:Enable

GS1 DataBar ExpandedStacked

0 : Disable 1:Enable

GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked (Number of rows) minimum

GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked (Number of rows) maximum

Send start/stop characters

0 : Disable 1:Enable

Inspect check-digit

0 : Disable 1:Enable

Send check-digit

0 : Disable 1:Enable

Full ASCII conversion

0 : Disable 1:Enable

Inspect check-digit

0 : Disable 1:Enable

Send check-digit

0 : Disable 1:Enable

E SR-750 UM

Page 78

Function

WP , mmm , nnn…

OK , WP

ER , WP , ee ee: Error code

RP , mmm

OK , RP , nnn…

ER , RP , ee ee: Error code

NW-7 (Codabar) settings

JAN/EAN/UPC settings

CODE128

Command

Setting

Number

value

0900 03 to 50 Maximum read length 50

0901 03 to 50 Minimum read length 4

0902 4 to 11 Quiet zone scale factor 7

0903 0,1

0904 0,1

0905 0,1

0906 0,1

0907 0 to 6

1002 4 to 11 Quiet zone scale factor 7

1003 0,1

1004 0,1

1005 0,1

1006 0,1

1007 0,1

1008 0,1

1009 0,1

1010 0,1

1011 0,1

110 0

001 to 128

110 1

1102 4 to 11 Quiet zone scale factor 7

1103 0,1

Explanation Default

Send start/stop characters

0 : Disable 1:Enable

Send start/stop characters letter type

0 : as lowercase 1 : as UPPERCASE

Inspect check-digit

0 : Disable 1:Enable

Send check-digit

0 : Disable 1:Enable

Check-digit type

0:Modulus 16 1:Modulus 11 2 : Modulus 10/Weight 2 3 : Modulus 10/Weight 3 4 : Check DR 5 : Modulus 11-A 6:Luhn

UPC-E reading

0 : Disable 1:Enable

EAN/JAN 8 digits reading

0 : Disable 1:Enable

EAN/JAN 13 digits reading

0 : Disable 1:Enable

UPC-A Output

0 : Output in 13 digits 1 : Output in 12 digits

Add "number system" to UPC-E

0 : Disable 1:Enable

2-digit supplemental

0 : Disable 1:Enable

5-digit supplemental

0 : Disable 1:Enable

Ignore UPC without supplemental

0 : Disable 1:Enable

GTIN compatible 14-digit output

0 : Disable 1:Enable

Maximum read length 128

Minimum read length 1

GS1-128

0 : Disable 1:Enable

Operation Configuration Command Format (WP/RP)

Operation configuration command is sent in the following format:

• Configuration change Send command

Response Normal process

Abnormal process

• Configuration confirmation

Send command

Response Normal process

Abnormal process

mmm : Command number Fixed to 3 bytes

nnn… : Setting value (varies according to command number)

example) When setting the trigger input measurement method to "One-shot

trigger" (one-shot signal trigger)

Configuration change Send command WP, 101, 1

Response (Normal process) OK, WP

Configuration confirmation Send command RP, 101

Response (Normal process) OK, RP, 1

 I/O terminal setting

Function

IN1 terminal function

IN2 terminal function

IN1 terminal test mode assignment

IN2 terminal test mode assignment

IN1 terminal

terminal

input at

setting

power-on

IN2 terminal input at power-on

Synchronizat ion of IN1 and TIMING LED

Synchronizat ion of IN2 and TIMING LED

Input polarity 010 0, 1

Input pulse width

Command

Number

000 0 to 8

001 0 to 8

002 1 to 3

003 1 to 3

006 0, 1

007 0, 1

008 0, 1

009 0, 1

011 0 to 2

Setting

value

Explanation Default

0:Not use 1 : Trigger input 2 : Preset Input 3 : Start test mode. 5 : Clear PLC link error 8 : Tuning operation

1 : Reading rate test 2 : Processing time test 3 : Position test

0:Not use 1:Enable

0 : Disable 1:Enable

0 : Normal open point 1 : Normal close point

0:1 ms 1:2 ms 2:10 ms

E SR-750 UM

Page 79

Command

Specify the setting by sum of the values of the items.

Number

020

021

022

024 0, 1

025

026 0, 1

Setting

value

0 to 3103

001 to 255

OUT terminal setting

Function

OUT1 terminal assignment

OUT2 terminal assignment

OUT3 terminal assignment

TRG_BUSY output upon power-up

Output ON duration for OUT terminal

External lighting output polarity

 Operation mode settings

Command

Number

101 0, 1

102

103

104

105 0, 1

Setting

value

0003 to 2550

hhhhhhh h···

Trigger input measurement method

Function

Trigger input measurement method

One-shot trigger duration

Trigger input ON command character string

Trigger input OFF command character string

Trigger input ON/OFF recognition with one character

Explanation Default

0 : Not selected 1: OK 2: NG 4 : ERROR

8: STABLE 16 : PRESET OK 32 : TRG BUSY 64 : LOCK BUSY

128 : MODE BUSY

256 : ERROR BUSY 1024 : UNSTABLE 2048 : TUNING OK

0 : Not selected 1: OK 2: NG 4 : ERROR

8: STABLE 16 : PRESET OK 32 : TRG BUSY 64 : LOCK BUSY

128 : MODE BUSY

256 : ERROR BUSY 1024 : UNSTABLE 2048 : TUNING OK

0 : Not selected 1: OK 2: NG 4 : ERROR

8: STABLE 16 : PRESET OK 32 : TRG BUSY 64 : LOCK BUSY

128 : MODE BUSY 256 : ERROR BUSY

512 : EXT. LIGHT 1024 : UNSTABLE 2048 : TUNING OK

0 : Disable 1: Enable

Specify in units of 10 ms 50

0 : N.O. (Normally open) 1 : N.C. (Normally closed)

Explanation Default

0 : Level trigger 1 : One-shot trigger

Specify in units of 10 ms 100

Specify up to 8 characters (16 HEX bytes) from HEX (0x00 to 0x7F).

0:Not use 1:Enable

* When set to Enable, only the

following control codes can be

specified to the trigger input ON/

OFF commands:

set for either the timing ON or

OFF command, the command is

not recognized in the "<STX>

command <ETX>" format.

480

4C4F4E

(LON)

4C4F4646

(LOFF)

Command

Function

Reading mode setting

Data

transmission

Multi read duplicate reading prevention interval

Duplicate reading prevention interval reset

Alternate start bank

Specifying alternate order

Reading

Read error

behavior

character

setting

string

Matching level OK/NG judgment

Matching level threshold

Laser-aim pulse duration in Multi read

Parameter bank LED display when reading

Burst interval 208

Burst count 210 1 to 8 3

Burst bank 211 01 to 10 1

Code quality verification standard selection

ISO/ IEC15415 verification threshold

ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-

2006) verification threshold

SAE AS9132

Code

verification

quality

threshold

verification

Grade

function

expression setting when appending values to verification result

Detailed item addition setting when appending values to verification result

Evaluation value addition setting when appending values to verification result

Setting

Number

value

200 0 to 3

201 0, 1

000 to

202

255

213 0, 1

203 01 to 10 1

204 0, 1

hhhhhhh

205

h…

206 0, 1

207 00 to 99

209 00 to 99 Specify by the 10 ms 10

212 0, 1

000 to 255

230 0 to F

231 0 to 4

232 0 to 4

233 0,1

350 0,1

351 0,1

352 0,1

Explanation Default

0:Single 1 : Multi1 2 : Multi2 3:Burst

0 : Send after read 1 : Send after timing off

Specify by the 100 ms 10

0 : Reset when a different code

is read

1 : Do not reset during duplicate

prevention interval.

0 : Order of parameter bank

number

1 : Begin with successful bank

Specify a maximum of 8 characters (HEX 16 bytes) with HEX (0x00 to 0x7F). Set FF if error codes are not output.

0:Enable 1 : Disable

0 : Disable 1:Enable

Specify by the 1 ms 0

0 : No selected 1 : ISO/IEC 15415 2 : ISO/IEC TR 29158

(AIM DPM-1-2006) 4 : SAE AS9132 8 : SEMI T10-0701

Specify the setting with HEX using sum of each item.

0 : Disable 1:D 2:C 3:B 4:A

0 : Disable 1:Enable

0:Alphabet 1 : Numerical value

0 : Do not append 1 : Append

4552524F52

(ERROR)

E SR-750 UM

Page 80

 Data appending function setting

Command

Function

Time appending 300 0, 1

Code type appending 301 0, 1

Symbol ID appending 302 0, 1

Bank number appending

Scan count appending 305 0, 1

Read time appending 306 0, 1

Position level appending

Code vertex appending 308 0, 1

Code center appending 309 0, 1

Unused ECC ratio appending

Matching level appending

File name appending (full path display)

Burst number appending

Read detailed error code appending

Setting the function to append ISO/IEC15415 verification result.

Setting the function to append ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-

2006) verification result.

Setting the function to append SAE AS9132 verification result

Setting the function to append SEMI T10-0701 verification result

Setting for Master/Slave group name addition

Setting for Master/Slave ID addition

Data edit function (Data edit by script)

Number

303 0, 1

307 0, 1

310 0, 1

312 0, 1

313 0, 1

318 0, 1

319 0, 1

340 0, 1

341 0, 1

342 0, 1

343 0, 1

320 0, 1

321 0, 1

360 0, 1

Setting

value

0 : Do not append 1 : Append

0 : Disable 1:Enable

 Verification/Preset function setting

Command

Function

Number of verification start digits

Number of verification digits

Preset data registration 402

Verification method 403 0, 1

Incremental setting for sequential value verification

Number

400

401

404

Setting

value

0001 to 7089

000 to

Maximum value for sequential

494

value verification = 9

Up to 494 characters (HEX 988

hhhhhhhh··

bytes) can be specified from HEX

(0x00 to 0x7F). FF : Not set

0 : Normal 1 : Sequential value verification

-9999 to

-9999 to +9999 +0001

+9999

Explanation Default

0001

494

 Image data saving function setting

Command

Function

Saving destination of read OK images

Saving destination of verification NG images

Saving destination of read error images

Saving destination of unstable images

Saving destination of capture images

Image saving mode 505 0 to 2

Specify the number of images to save from trigger input ON/OFF

Burst number to save when burst read error occurs

Edit image file name function (Edit image file name by script)

Setting

Number

value

500 0, 3

501 0, 3

502 0 to 3

503 0, 3

504 1, 3

506 01 to 10 10

507

BBBBBBBB

510 0, 1

0 : Disable saving 3 : FTP transmission

0 : Disable saving 1 : Saving to RAM 2 : Saving to ROM 3 : FTP transmission

0 : Disable saving 3 : FTP transmission

1 : Saving to RAM 3 : FTP transmission

0 : Latest bank image 1 : Specified number of images

after trigger input ON 2 : Specified number of images

after trigger input OFF

B = 0, 1

0 : Disable saving 1:Save

* Burst number 1 is on the top.

0 : Disable 1:Enable

 Other settings

Command

Function

Output data on TEST switch

Delimiter character 601 hh

Inter delimiter 602

Data filling size 603

Data filling character 604 hh

Silent Mode 606 0 to 255

Reader name 607

Monitor output data priority display position

Trigger comman d response character string

TUNE button lock 611 0, 1

Laser aimer setting by TUNE button

Trigger comman d success response character string

Trigger comman d failure response character string

Camera rotation settings

Setting

Number

value

600

hhhhhhh h···

000 to 999

hhhhhhh h

609 0, 1

610 0 to 2

612 0 to 3

613 hhhh…

614 hhhh… 4552

901 0, 1

0 : Disable 1:Enable

Specify 1 character (2 HEX characters) from (0x00 to 0x7F)

Specify up to 5 characters (10 HEX bytes) from HEX (0x00 to 0x7F). FF : Not set

Specify 1 character (2 HEX characters) from (0x00 to 0x7F)

0 : Not selected 1 : Verification OK, Read OK 2 : Verification NG 4 : Read ERROR

8 : Stable reading 16 : Unstable reading 32 : Preset result 64 : Test Mode

Specify the setting by sum of the values of the items.

Specify up to 8 characters (16 HEX bytes) from UNICODE (UTF-16 BigEndian). FF : Not set

0 : Display data from front 1 : Display data from back

0:Default 1 : SR-600 compatible 2 : User setting

0 : Disable lock 1:Enable lock

0:None 1 : Emit in test mode only 2 : Emit in operating mode only 3 : Emit always

Up to 8 characters can be specified. Specify characters with HEX (0x00 to 0x7F).

* This is valid when the trigger

command response character setting is User setting.

0 : Normal Mode 1 : 180 degrees rotation

Explanation Default

11111111

Explanation Default

000

005200450 041004400

450052

(READER)

4F4B

E SR-750 UM

Page 81

 Tuning settings

Important

WN , mmm , nnn…

OK , WN

ER , WN , ee ee: Error code

RN , mmm

OK , RN , nnn…

ER , RN , ee ee: Error code

* Set when used

as a client

Command

Function

Brightness adjustment mode

Exposure on high speed mode

Offset setting 803

Dynamic range setting 804 0, 1

Tuning mode 805 0, 1

Codes to read while tuning

Allow reduced detection count while tuning

Tuning target code 820

Black-white reverse read setting when tuning

Internal lighting when tuning

External lighting when tuning

Setting

Number

value

801 0, 1

802 3 to 333

000 to 255

808 01 to 16 1

809 0, 1

1 to 00773

823 0 to 2

821 0, 1

822 0, 1

Explanation Default

0 : High quality mode 1 : High speed mode

Exposure time = setting value × 30 μs

Use the default value of 255 for normal use.

0 : Hi-Sensitive/Hi-SNR 1 : Hi-DR

0 : Normal Mode 1 : Filter

0 : Do not allow 1 : Allow

1: QR

2 : DataMatrix 10 : GS1 DataBar 20 : CODE39 40 : ITF

100 : NW-7 (Codabar) 200 : JAN/EAN/UPC

400 : CODE128 Specify the setting using sum of each item.

0 : Disable 1:Enable 2 : Automatic

0:Not used 1:Used

0005

255

00773

Communication Configuration Command Format (WN/RN)

Communication configuration command is sent in the following format:

• Configuration change Send command

Response Normal process

Abnormal process

• Configuration confirmation

Send command

Response Normal process

Abnormal process

mmm : Command number Fixed to 3 bytes nnn… : Setting value (varies according to command number)

example: Changing SR-750 Series IP address to "192.168.100.1"

Configuration change Send command WN, 200, 192.168.100.1

Configuration confirmation Send command RN, 200

To change and apply the communication configuration, make sure to send a SAVE command.

Response (Normal process) OK, WN

Response (Normal process) OK, RN, 192.168.100.1

 Communication port settings

Command

Function

Command port configuration

Data port 1 configuration

Data port 2 configuration

Append checksum 003 0, 1

Append data size 004 0, 1

Header settings 005 hhhh···

Terminator settings 006 hhhh···

Number

000 0 to 2

001 0 to 2

002 0 to 2

Setting

value

Explanation Default

0:Not used 1:RS232C 2 : Ethernet

0:Not used 1 : Reserve 2 : Ethernet

0 : Disable 1:Enable

Specify up to 5 characters (16 HEX bytes) from HEX (0x00 to 0x7F). FF : Not set

 RS-232C communication settings

Command

Function

Baud rate setting 100 0 to 4

Data length setting 101 0, 1

Parity check setting 102 0 to 2

Stop bit length setting 103 0, 1

Communication protocol setting

Number

104 0 to 2

Setting

value

Explanation Default

0 : 9600bps 1 : 19200bps 2 : 38400bps 3 : 57600bps 4 : 115200bps

0:7bit 1:8bit

0 : Disable 1:Even 2:Odd

0:1bit 1:2bit

0 : No Handshaking 1:PASS/RTRY 2:ACK/NAK

 Ethernet communication settings

Command

Function

IP address setting 200 a. b. c. d

Subnet mask setting 201 8 to 30

Default gateway setting 202 a. b. c. d

IP address setting at connection destination

Port number setting for connection destination

Setting of connection establishment request transmission

Port number setting for Data port 1

Port number setting for command port

Keep/Alive function setting for Data port 1

Command port Keep/ Alive function setting

Setting

Number

value

203 a. b. c. d

1024 to

204

65535

205 0, 1

1024 to

206

65535

1024 to

207

65535

208 0, 1

209 0, 1

Explanation Default

a : 0 to 255 b : 0 to 255 c : 0 to 255 d : 0 to 255

Specify with bit length

255.255.255.0 ···24

255.0.0.0 ···8

a : 0 to 255 b : 0 to 255 c : 0 to 255 d : 0 to 255

0 : Disable 1:Enable

Unavailable: 9013, 9014, 9015, 9016, 5920, 44818

0:Not use 1:Enable

192.168.

100.100

0.0.0.0

(Not set)

0.0.0.0

(Not set)

9004

E SR-750 UM

Page 82

 Data port 2 settings

*1: When Data port 2

is set to Ethernet, 1 cannot be used.

*2: Depends on the

Data port 2 configuration.

Command

Function

Remote IP address (TCP communication)

Remote port (TCP communication)

Protocol setting 303 0 to 5

DM front address 304

Control region address 305

Response region address

Output data length setting

PLC link timing input 308 0, 1

Timing/Data wait 309 00 to 99 by the 100 ms 1

Retry duration (s) 310 01 to 30 by the second 5

EtherNet/IP data handshake setting

EtherNet/IP Input assembly data size setting

EtherNet/IP Output assembly data size setting

EtherNet/IP Byte swapping setting

PROFINET device name

PROFINET handshake 331 0, 1

Number

300 a.b.c.d

1024 to

301

65535

MC: 0 to 32767 SYSWAY: 0 to 9999 KV: 0 to 65534

MC: 0 to 7F SYSWAY: 0 to 6143 KV: 1 to 599

MC: 0 to 7F SYSWAY:

306

0 to 6143 KV: 1 to 599

001 to

307

100

321 0, 1

0040 to

322

1400

0040 to

323

1400

324 0, 1

330 nnn…

Setting

value

Explanation Default

a:0 to 255 b:0 to 255

c:0 to 255

d:0 to 255

Use when the protocol is TCP.

Use only for TPC protocol. 5000

0 : MC protocol 1 : SYSWAY

2 : KV STUDIO 3:None

4 : EtherNet/IP 5:PROFINET

* Set the upper limit of writing length.

0 : Disable 1:Enable

0 : Do not handshake 1 : Handshake

by 1 500

0 : Disable (ROCKWELL) 1 : Enable (KEYENCE/OMRON)

Up to 240 characters Specify with ASCII codes * Device naming rule

1 : PROFINET device name

2 : 1 label length: 1 to 63

3 : Only [a to z] (alphabet lower

4 : [-] (hyphen) cannot be used at

5 : [-] (hyphen) cannot be used at

6 : port-xyz, port-xyz-abcde

7 : Device names cannot be

8 : Labels cannot start with xn-. 9 : The first character of labels

If these rules are not observed, an error occurs.

0 : Do not handshake 1 : Handshake

or TCP

length: 1 to 240 characters

characters

case), [0 to 9] (numbers), [-] (hyphen), [.] (period) can be used for a device name.

the beginning of the label.

the end of the label.

cannot be the name of the first label. abcde and xyz mean [0 to 9] (numbers).

made in the IP address format. (n.n.n.n n=0.….999)

cannot be a number.

(Not set)

0.0.0.0

sr-750

 FTP Communication Settings

Command

Function

IP address of the connection destination FTP server

User name of the connection destination FTP server

Password of the connection destination FTP server

Directory transfer at connection

Directly name of the transfer destination

FTP connection request transmission as necessary

NOOP command transmission

NOOP command transmission interval

PASV command transmission

Format setting for FTP transmission

JPEG quality for FTP transmission

Binning setting for FTP transmission

Setting

Number

value

a : 0 to 255 b : 0 to 255

400 a.b.c.d

401 aaaa··· ASCII setting (max. 16 characters) admin

402 aaaa··· ASCII setting (max. 16 characters) admin

403 0, 1

404 aaaa··· ASCII setting (max. 32 characters) image

405 0, 1

406 0, 1

407 01 to 10 units: minute 1

408 0, 1

411 0, 1

412 01 to 10 05

413 0 to 3

c : 0 to 255

d : 0 to 255 For 0.0.0.0., the FTP client does not operate.

0 : Disable

1:Enable

0 : Disable

1:Enable

0 : Disable

1:Enable

0 : Disable

1:Enable

0:Bitmap

1:JPEG

0 : No binning

1 : 1/4 skipping

2 : 1/16 skipping

3 : 1/64 skipping

 Master/Slave function settings

Command

Function

Master/Slave operation configuration

Master/Slave ID during operation

Number of read data in Multi Head mode

Master/Slave function group name

Setting

Number

value

500 0 to 2

501 0 to 31 If 0 is set, it operates as Master. 0

502 1 to 8 1

503 nnnn…

0 : Disable

1 : Multi drop link

2 : Multi head

Up to 16 characters Specify with ASCII codes * 0x20 to 0x7E of ASCII codes can

Explanation Default

be used.

0.0.0.0

(Not set)

GROUP01

E SR-750 UM

Page 83

 SNTP settings

WA ,

Setting

command 1

Setting

command 2

,…

OK , WA

ER , WA , n ,

Error

command type

,ee

RA ,

Setting

command 1

Setting

command 2

,…

OK , RA ,

Confirmation

command 1 response

Confirmation

command 2 response

,…

ER , RA , n ,

Error

command type

,ee

B , bb mmm , nnn…

B , bb mmm

B , bb nnn…

C , A mm , nnn…

C,A mm

C , A nnn…

P , mmm , nnn…

P,mmm

P , nnn…

Command

Function

Remote SNTP server address

Time zone 521 0 to 33

Update cycle (min) 522 1 to 99 1

Setting

Number

value

520 a. b. c. d

Explanation Default

a:0 to 255 b:0 to 255

c:0 to 255

d:0 to 255 If 0.0.0.0 is set, the SNTP server is not accessed.

0 to 32

0 : GMT-12:00 1 : GMT-11:00 2 : GMT-10:00 3 : GMT-9:00 4 : GMT-8:00 PSD 5 : GMT-7:00 6 : GMT-6:00 CST, Mexico City,

Central America 7 : GMT-5:00 EST 8 : GMT-4:30 9 : GMT-4:00 AST

10 : GMT-3:30 11 : GMT-3:00 Brasilia 12 : GMT-2:00 Central Atlantic 13 : GMT-1:00 14 : GMT London, UTC 15 : GMT+1:00 Berlin, Brussels,

Rome, Paris, Berne

16 : GMT+2:00 Athens,

Jerusalem

17 : GMT+3:00 Kuwait 18 : GMT+3:30 19 : GMT+4:00 Moscow 20 : GMT+4:30 21 : GMT+5:00 22 : GMT+5:30 New Delhi 23 : GMT+5:45 24 : GMT+6:00 25 : GMT+6:30 26 : GMT+7:00 Bangkok 27 : GMT+8:00 Kuala Lumpur,

Singapore, Taipei, Beijing

28 : GMT+9:00 Japan, Seoul 29 : GMT+9:30 30 : GMT+10:00 Canberra,

Sydney

31 : GMT+11:00 32 : GMT+12:00 33 : GMT+13:00

0.0.0.0

Batch transmission of setting/confirmation commands (WA/RA)

The SR-750 Series has the dedicated command that has been prepared for batch transmission of multiple setting/confirmation commands (WB/RB, WC/RC, WP/RP, WN/RN). Use this command to reduce the number of times to send setting commands.

Batch transmission command format

Send the batch transmission command in the following formats.

• Configuration change Send command

Response Normal process

Abnormal process

• Configuration confirmation

Send command

Response Normal process

Abnormal process

Setting command 1, Setting command 2 : Setting command type Confirmation command 1, Confirmation command 2

: Confirmation command type

n : Location where an error

occurs Head 1

Error command type : Type of command where an

error occurs

ee : Error code

• When using the batch transmission command, the reflecting order of the setting is the same as the sending order of the setting commands.

• Make sure to send the SAVE command after sending the batch transmission command containing the communication setting command.

• The batch transmission command can send up to 2048 bytes of number of characters (excluding header and terminator).

• The location (n) of the error command returns the location first confirmed from the head of the transmission command.

Each Setting/Confirmation Command Format

When using the batch transmission command, link each setting/confirmation command in the following format after deleting W/R from each command.

 Parameter bank configuration command

Change command

Confirmation command

Confirmation command response

bb : Parameter bank number 01 - 10 Fixed to 2 bytes mmm : Command number Fixed to 3 bytes nnn··· : Setting value (varies according to command

number)

 Code configuration command for tuning

Change command

Confirmation command

Confirmation command response

A : Code setting number 1 to 8 1-byte Fixed to 1 byte mm : Command number Fixed to 2 bytes nnn··· : Setting value (changeable according to the

command number)

 Operation configuration command

Change command

Confirmation command

Confirmation command response

mmm : Command number Fixed to 3 bytes nnn··· : Setting value (varies according to command

number)

E SR-750 UM

Page 84

 Communication configuration command

N , mmm , nnn…

N,mmm

N , nnn…

WA,B,01700,2,P,200,0,P,201,1

OK , WA

RA , B , 01700 , P , 200 , P , 201

OK,RA,B,2,P,0,P,1

WA,N, 000 , 2 ,N,001,2 ,N,002, 1

OK , WA

RA ,N, 000 ,N,001,N,002

OK,RA,N, 2,N,0 ,N, 1

Change command

Confirmation command

Confirmation command response

mmm : Command number Fixed to 3 bytes nnn··· : Setting value (varies according to command

example)

(1) Batch transmission of the WB command and WP command

Send command

Response

(2) Confirm the setting content sent at (1)

Send command

Response

(3) Sending multiple WN commands

Send command

Response

* After sending WN commands, make sure to send the SAVE command to

reflect the setting.

(4) Confirm the setting content sent at (3)

Send command

Response

number)

E SR-750 UM

Page 85

9-1 PLC Link

Important

59907F

This chapter presents an overview and the control method of the PLC link.

PLC Link

The PLC link allows the SR-750 Series to directly write data into the internal memory of the PLC (programmable logic controller) via the RS-232C interface and Ethernet interface. Since the SR-750 Series directly controls memory in the PLC, it eliminates the need for a communication program. Therefore, man-hours needed to create programs can be reduced.

The following restrictions are imposed regarding the use of the PLC link:

• The SR-750 configuration cannot be changed via PLC link.

• Test mode cannot be activated via PLC link.

• Operation command and setup command cannot be sent via PLC link.

• Due to long communication time, it is not suitable for a line that requires high-speed processing.

• The amount of data that can be processed depends on the output data length. A maximum number of digits is 100. (Default output data length is 64 digits.)

List of supported PLCs

RS-232C Interface

 KEYENCE

Series name Connection method Model

KV Series

 Mitsubishi Electric

Series name Connection method Model

MELSEC Series Serial communication unit

 OMRON

Series name Connection method Model

SYSMAC Series

* A serial option board is necessary, depending on the model.

Ethernet Interface

 KEYENCE

Series name Connection method Model

KV Series

 Mitsubishi Electric

CPU built-in port KV-3000, KV Nano Series

Communication unit

CPU built-in port

Serial option board

Serial communication unit

Communication board CS1-SUB□□-V1

CPU built-in port KV-5000/5500

Ethernet unit KV-LE21V/LE20V, KV-NC1EP

KV-L20V/L20R, KV-N10L/NC10L/NC20L

QJ71C24N/-R2

LJ71C24/-R2

CS1 Series

CJ1 Series

CJ2 Series

CP1 Series

CP1W-CIF01

CP1W-CIF11

CP1W-CIF12

CJ1W-SCU□□(-V1)

CS1W-SCU□□-V1

Devices that can be used

Devices accessible via PLC link are as follows:

PLC Specified area Device name Available range

KV Series

MELSEC Series

SYSMAC Series

• The available range is a maximum value of the device accessible when the PLC link function is used. To specify the DM front address, control region address, or response region address, configure by taking into account the number of necessary devices.

• The device region that can actually be used may not be configured up to a maximum value or may include unavailable area, depending on specifications and configuration. For more information on available regions, refer to the appropriate PLC manual.

*1 AutoID Network Navigator entry field range: to *2 AutoID Network Navigator entry field range: to

• Specifying the Control region address and the Response region address Inputting in the AutoID Network Navigator entry field means that the shaded area as indicated below is specified.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 2 ←Front address

Control region

Response region

Data region Data memory DM0 to DM65534

Control region Input device Y0 to Y7FF

Response region Output device X0 to X7FF

Data region Data register 0 to 32737

Control region

Response region

Data region Data memory D0000 to D9999

Input relay, output relay R100 to R59915

CIO, internal auxiliary relay

0 to 6143 ch

9-2 Configuration

This section describes the configuration of the SR-750 Series and PLC.

SR-750 Series configuration

Configure the SR-750 Series using the AutoID Network Navigator as follows:

1 Set the interface to "RS-232C" or "Ethernet" under the PLC

communication in the Communication 2 tab.

• When the interface is set to "RS-232C", command communication and PC host output interface configuration are switched to "Not used".

2 Select the protocol appropriate for the PLC to be used.

• Mitsubishi MELSEC Series : MC Protocol

• OMRON SYSMAC Series : SYSWAY * RS-232C only

• KEYENCE KV Series : KV STUDIO

3-1 When the interface is set to RS-232C, set "Baud rate", "Data

length", "Stop bit length" to match the configuration in the PLC.

3-2 When the interface is set to Ethernet, set "IP address" and "Port

number" in the PLC.

4 Set "PLC link timing input".

To perform read operation using A00: PLC timing area, set "PLC link timing input" in the [Table] tab to "Enable". To input the timing signal directly into the SR-750 Series, set it to "Disable".

5 Set "DM address", " Control region address", and "Response region

address".

"9-3 Device Assignment (Page 87)"

Series name Connection method Model

Q03/04/06/10/13/20/26/50/ 100UDECPU L02CPU/06CPU/26CPU-BT

MELSEC Series

CPU built-in port

Ethernet unit QJ71E71-100/-B5/-B2

E SR-750 UM

Page 86

Configuring the KV Series

RS-232C Interface

Operation KV BUILDER/KV STUDIO mode

Interface RS-232C

Division 0

Baud rate Automatic

Data bit length 8 bits

Parity Even (e)

Stop bit length 1 bit

Checksum None

RS/CSFlow control Disable

*1 To use port2, set the interface to "RS-232C". *2 For KV BUILDER/KV STUDIO mode, a fixed value is used.

Ethernet Interface

IP address 192.168.0.10 (default)

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 (default)

Port (VT) 8502 (default)

MELSEC Series Configuration

RS-232C Interface

 QJ71C24N/-R2

Set communication conditions with the GX-Developer. ("I/O assignment configuration" in "PC parameters")

Type Intelligent

Type name Name of the unit to be installed

Points 32 points

First XY First output signal of the target unit (hexadecimal number)

("Option configuration" under "I/O assignment settings" in "PC parameters")

Unit type Serial communication/modem interface unit

Unit type name Name of the unit to be installed

("Switch configuration" under "I/O assignment configuration" in "PC parameters")

Setting item Va lu e

Operation configuration Independent

Data bit length 8 bits

Parity bit Present

Odd/even parity Odd (o)

Stop bit length 1 bit

Checksum code Present

Writing during RUN Allowed

Configuration change Allowed

Communication rate configuration

Communication protocol configuration

Division configuration 0

9600 bps

MC protocol (format 5)

Ethernet Interface

 QJ71E71-100/-B5/-B2

Set communication conditions with the GX-Developer. ("I/O assignment configuration" in "PC parameters")

Type Intelligent

Type name Name of the unit to be installed

Points 32 points

First XY First output signal of the target unit (hexadecimal number)

(Target unit number for "Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET" in "Network parameters")

Network type Ethernet

First I/O No.

Network No. Any number

Group No. Any number

Division Any number

Mode Online

Number specified in "I/O assignment configuration" in PC parameters

("Operation configuration" for "Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET" in "Network parameters")

Communication data code configuration

Initial timing configuration Always waiting for OPEN (Communication possible during STOP)

IP address 192.168.0.20

Writing permitted during RUN

Send frame configuration Ethernet (V2.0)

TCP living confirmation configuration

Binary code communication

Check

KeepAlive is used.

*1 Configure so that it matches the network. * The port number is 5000.

 Q03/04/06/10/13/20/26/50/100UDECPU

Set communication conditions with the GX-Developer. ("Built-in Ethernet port configuration" in "PC parameters")

IP address 192.168.0.20 *1

Subnet mask patterns 255.255.255.0

Default router IP address 192.168.0.254

Communication data code configuration

Writing permitted during RUN (FTP and MC protocol)

Binary code communication

Check

*1 Configure so that it matches the network. ("Built-in Ethernet port configuration" in "PC parameters")

Protocol UDP

Open system MC protocol

Port number with Ethernet module installed

232C (hexadecimal number) * Any number

* The port number of the SR-750 Series must be specified in decimal number while

the Q Series port number with Ethernet module installed is specified in hexadecimal number.

Example)

Hexadecimal number Decimal number

232C 9004

 L02CPU/26CPU-BT

Set communication conditions with the GX-Works2. ("Built-in Ethernet port configuration" in "PC parameters")

IP address 192.168.0.20

Subnet mask patterns 255.255.255.0

Default router IP address 192.168.0.254

Communication data code configuration

Writing permitted during RUN (FTP and MC protocol)

Binary code communication

Check

*1 Make the configuration appropriate to the network. ("Built-in Ethernet port configuration" in "PC parameters")

Protocol UDP

Open system MC protocol

Port number with Ethernet module installed

232C (hexadecimal number) * Any number

* The port number of the SR-750 Series must be set in decimal numbers.

E SR-750 UM

Page 87

Configuring the SYSMAC Series

9-3 Device Assignment

RS-232C Interface

Set communication conditions with the CX-Programmer.

 CPU built-in port

PLC system configuration→Upper link port (serial port)

Communication configuration

Baud rate 9600 bits/s

Parameter 7,2,E

Mode Upper link

ID No. 0

User configuration

* When communication configuration is established as a standard, baud rate and

parameters are fixed as above.

 Serial communication unit/board

CJ1W-SCU□□(-V1) CS1W-SCU□□-V1 CS1-SUB□□-V1 I/O table/unit configuration

Presence or absence of optional configuration

Communication mode Upper link

Data length 7 bits

Stop bit 2 bits

Parity Even

Transmission rate 9600 bps

CTS control None

Upper link ID No 0

Optional configuration

To use the SR-750 Series over the PLC link, functions of the SR-750 Series need to be assigned to the PLC devices. For the SR-750 Series, the first address of each device is assigned in response to target function.

• Control region : Device used to write a command from the PLC. One channel is used for device assignment.

• Response region : Device used to write a response from the SR-750 Series. One channel is used for device assignment.

• Data region : Device used to write alternate instructions of the SR-750 Series and result data from the SR-750 Series. Occupies a maximum of 54 devices with serial numbers.

Function Assignment of Control Region, Response Region, and Data Region

This section describes assignment of functions of each region.

Assignment of Control Region Functions

When the control region address A is specified, functions are assigned in order as shown below starting with the specified beginning address.

A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A09 A08 A07 A06 A05 A04 A03 A02 A01 A00

Reserved area

Address Description Data description

A00 PLC timing area

Data write processing

A01

method

Sequential processing

A02

Data write enabled

0:Instruction for timing OFF 1: Instruction for timing ON

0: Real time processing 1: Sequential processing

0: Data write disabled 1: Data write enabled

* When performing the trigger input ON/OFF using the PLC timing area, set "PLC

link timing input" to "Enable".

SR-750

Write

× ○

PLC Write

Assignment of Response Region Functions

When the response region address B is specified, functions are assigned in order as shown below starting with the specified beginning address.

B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 B00

Reserved area

Address Description Data description

PLC timing input

B00

response area

B01 Reserved area ―――

Sequential processing

B02

Data write request

Sequential processing

B03

Data write complete

Real time processing

B04

Data being written

0: Timing OFF 1: Instruction for timing ON

0: No data 1: Data write request

0: Data write incomplete 1: Data write complete

0: No data being written 1: Data being written

* Do not use the reserved area.

SR-750

Write

○ ×

PLC Write

E SR-750 UM

Page 88

Assignment of Data Region Functions

Point

When the data region address D is specified, functions are assigned in order as shown below starting with the specified beginning address.

*2*3*4

SR-750

Write

× ○

○ ×

PLC Write

Address Description Data description

0: Do not specify bank

D+00 Specify reading bank

D+01 Specify ID

D+02 Output data length

D+03

D+04

D+05

…… …

D+53

D+54 Data writing ID

D+55

D+56 to D+59

D+60 to D+109

D+110 to D+159

…… … … …

D+1560 to D+1609

When the next data reaches at the count of 65535, the value of count returns to 1.

2 When the output data length is an odd number, [NUL] (0x00) is written in the

Data writing process count

1st and 2nd digits of output data

3rd and 4th digits of output data

99th and 100th digits of output data

Timing input count for

Master

Reserved area × ×

Output data 1 to 100

digits

Output data 1 to 100

digits

Output data 1 to 100

digits

(Alternate) 1 to 16: Specify bank n

• SR-750: 1 to 10

• SR-D100: 1 to 16

Specify the Master/Slave ID for timing input when the Multi drop is set. 0 to 31: Unit ID

Length of data (read data + append data) output from the SR-750 Series * Length of data most recently

output when using the Master/Slave function.

Read data writing count from the SR-750 Series to PLC is displayed.

ASCII code 2 characters Data of Master ID: 0 is displayed when using the Master/Slave function.

ID of Master/Slave unit to which most recent data is written is displayed.

Timing input count for Master is displayed.

Data of Slave ID: 1 is displayed when using the Master/Slave function.

Data of Slave ID: 2 is displayed when using the Master/Slave function.

Data of Slave ID: 31 is displayed when using the Master/Slave function.

"Output data length + 1".

*3 The order in which data of each PLC is stored is as follows:

MELSEC : Low order byte → High order byte SYSMAC : High order byte → Low order byte KV : High order byte → Low order byte

4 The data length output from the SR-750 Series depends on the data output

length set in the SR-750 Series. (Default: 64 digits)

*5 Used only when Master/Slave function is set.

0-byte data is output as data with a length of 0.

If output data cannot fit in the output data region, data after that length will be discarded. However, for the length of D+02, the data length output by the SR750 Series is written.

Detailed Description of Device Assignment Function

Read timing area (A00, B00)

This function is used when "PLC link timing input" is set to "Enable". The usage varies depending on the measurement method.

 Assigning read timing area

Address Description Data description

A00 PLC timing area

B00 PLC timing input response area

• When the A00 switches to ON (1), the SR-750 Series starts reading.

• The B00 address is an area used to verify if the SR-750 has recognized A00

correctly. When the SR-750 recognizes A00 correctly (=LED emits light), B00 switches to ON (1).

0: Instruction for timing OFF 1: Instruction for timing ON

0: Timing OFF 1: Instruction for timing ON

 Level trigger operation procedure

1 Set the A00 and B00 addresses to OFF (0). 2 To start the SR-750 Series reading (turn on timing), set the A00

address to ON (1).

3 When the SR-750 Series recognizes the A00 address, the B00

address switches to ON (1), and reading starts.

If the B00 does not switch to ON (1), do not perform the following operations because the SR-750 Series has not recognized the A00 address.

4 Once the code has been read, new data is written into D+04 to D+53. 5 To turn off the timing, set the A00 address to OFF (0). 6 When the SR-750 Series recognizes the A00 address, the B00

address switches to OFF (0), and the timing turns OFF.

7 When a read error occurs, an error code is written into D+04 to D+53.

When the timing of the SR-750 Series is turned ON/OFF at high speed with the A00 address, the SR-750 Series may miss the A00 address, causing an error such as failure to turn ON/OFF triggger input. In such a case, program to allow checking with the B00 address to see if the SR-750 Series recognized the A00 address.

 One-shot trigger operation procedure

1 Set the A00 and B00 addresses to OFF (0). 2 To start the SR-750 Series reading (turn on timing), set the A00

address to ON (1).

3 When the SR-750 Series recognizes the A00 address, the B00

address switches to ON (1), and reading starts.

If the B00 does not switch to ON (1), do not perform the following operation, because the SR-750 Series has not recognized the A00 address.

4 Read operation is carried out for "one-shot trigger duration"

configured for the SR-750 Series.

5 Once the code has been read, new data is written into D+04 to D+53.

When a read error occurs, an error code is written into D+04 to D+53.

6 When the A00 address is set to OFF (0), the B00 address switches to

OFF (0).

E SR-750 UM

Page 89

Data write processing method (A01 to A02, B02 to B04, D+03)

Point

The following 2 methods for writing data are available, depending on applications:

 Real time processing

Address Description Data description

A01 Data write processing format

Real time processing

B04

Data being written

• To conduct real time processing, set the A01 address to OFF (0) in advance.

• When data is being written into the PLC, B04 switches to ON (1), and it switches to OFF (0) when write is completed.

When the SR-750 Series reads bar codes at intervals faster than PLC communication, data that is not written into the PLC will be stored in the send buffer of the SR-750 Series. The SR-750 can hold up to 100 pieces of data. When data exceeds the limit, all data in the buffer is erased and "OVER" is written into the D+04 to D+53 address. When a send buffer overflow occurs, the SR-750 Series stops operation, writes "OVER" into the PLC, and then returns to an operating state.

0: Real time processing 1: Sequential processing

0: No data being written 1: Data being written

 Sequential processing operating procedure

1 Set the A01 address to ON (1). 2 When the SR-750 completes reading codes, the B02 address

switches to ON (1). When the A02 address is set to ON (1), the SR750 Series writes read data into the D+04 to D+53 address.

3 When read data writing is completed, the B03 address switches to

ON (1). When the switch of the B03 address to ON (1) is confirmed, set the A02 address to OFF (0).

When the A02 address switches to OFF (0), the B03 address also switches to OFF (0). The B02 address switches to OFF (0) when there is no data in the SR750 Series, but stays ON (1) when data remains.

4 When the A02 address switches to OFF (0), program data in the D+04

to D+53 address.

Specify read bank (D+00)

Specify a bank used for read operation.

Address Description Data description Data format

D+00 Specify read bank

0: Bank not specified (alternate) 1 to 10: Bank n specified

Binary code

 Real time processing operating procedure

1 Set the A01 address to OFF (0). 2 When the SR-750 Series is writing read data into the D+04 to D+53

address, the B04 address switches to ON (1).

3 When writing of read data is complete, the B04 address returns to

OFF (0).

4 Confirm that the B04 address has returned to OFF (0) and program

data in the D+04 to D+53 address.

The D+03 address value increments every time 1 piece of data is written. By checking the D+03 address value when the B04 address returns to OFF (0), an omission can be prevented.

 Sequential processing

Address Description Data description Data format

A01 Data write processing method

Sequential processing

A02

Data write enabled

Sequential processing

B02

Data write request

Sequential processing

B03

Data write complete

• To conduct sequential processing, set the A01 address to ON (1) in advance.

• When the A02 address value is ON (1), the SR-750 Series writes code data read into the D+04 to D+53 address,

• When data writing is completed, set the B03 address to ON (1).

• When read data is in the SR-750 Series, the B02 address switches to ON (1).

• When the A02 address is OFF (0), the SR-750 Series stores data in the send buffer without writing new data.

0: Real time processing 1: Sequential processing

0: Data write disabled 1: Data write enabled

0: No data 1: Data write request

0: Data write incomplete 1: Data write complete

Binary

Output data length (D+02)

The area is used to write data length output from the SR-750.

Address Description Data description Data format

D+02 Output data length

Point

The output data means "Appended data + Read data".

Length of data output from the SR750 Series

Binary code

Output data (D+04 to D+53)

Address Description Data description Data format

D+04 to

Output data

D+53

1 When the output data length is an odd number, [NUL] (0x00) is written in the

"Output data length + 1".

2 The order in which data of each PLC is stored is as follows:

MELSEC : Low order byte → High order byte SYSMAC : High order byte → Low order byte KV : High order byte → Low order byte

3 The data length output from the SR-750 Series depends on the data output

length set in the SR-750 Series main unit. (Default: 64 digits)

2 characters of ASCII code/

*1 *2 *3

address

ASCII code

In sequential processing, when the A02 address is OFF (0), new data is not sent to the PLC, but stored in the send buffer of the SR750 Series. When a maximum number of 100 pieces of data is exceeded, a buffer overflow occurs, and operation stops. When a buffer overflow occurs, operation stops until "OVER" is sent to the PLC. When the PLC is ready for receiving data, be sure to set the A02 address to ON (1).

E SR-750 UM

Page 90

9-4 Reference Program

OFF

Reading success Reading error

Control region

Response

region

Read operation (The light is illuminated.)

Processing

method A+01

Timing instruction

A+00

Timing response

B+00

Data being written

B+04

Data region

Read bank

Instruction D+00

Data region

D+02~

Alternate instruction or the specified value of parameter bank

Read

data

Read

error

Reading OK

Read error

OFF

Reading success Reading error

Control region

Response

region

Read operation (The light is illuminated.)

Processing

method A+01

Timing instruction

A+00

Timing response

B+00

Data write

request B+02

Data region

Read bank

instruction D+00

Data region

D+02~

Alternate instruction or the specified value of parameter bank

Read

data

Read

error

Data write

complete B+03

Data write

enabled A+02

Specifying alternate function

CR2008

Timing input processing

R000 R100

Data processing

R204

Program data to be written into DM1004 or later.

END

ENDH

DM1000

Specifying sequential processing and alternate function

CR2008

R101

SET

Timing input processing

R000

R100

Sequential processing

R202

Program read data to be written into DM1004 or later.

END

ENDH

R102

R203

Data processing

R203

DM1000

This section introduces simple reference programs regarding the PLC link with the SR-750 Series. In actual operation, program by taking into account error handling, etc.

Timing diagram

In the following timing diagram, an explanation of operation of devices and the SR750 Series in real time processing and sequential processing is given. Construct an operation program by referring to the timing diagram.

 Real time processing

• When starting the program, specify the alternate function or parameter bank number to be used. (D+00 region)

• Read data is overwritten in the data region (D+02 and over). To transfer data, do so at the timing for setting the flag (B+04) to OFF.

• Data from D+02 will be overwritten. As a result, if the length changes, since there may remain previous data in the region, program to delete data from D+04, after transferring data if necessary.

 Sequential processing

Reference Program

This is a reference program for the use of the KV Series. In this program, error handling is not considered, thus program by taking into account error handling and test in actual operation.

 SR-750 Series configuration

It is assumed that the SR-750 Series is configured as follows:

• Timing : Level trigger

• Read mode : Single

• Memory assignment DM front address: DM1000 Control region address: R100 Response region address: R200

• PLC link timing input : Yes

* To use on a trial basis, specify the PLC communication interface to the SR-750

Series and perform communication configuration for the KV Series.

 Real time processing

Write "0" into DM1000 and set to use the alternate function.

Input R000 as read timing.

 Sequential processing

• When starting the program, set the processing method (A+01) to sequential processing, and specify the alternate function or parameter bank number to be used in the D-00 region.

• When data write request (B+02) is ON and data write complete (B+03) is OFF, program to set data write enabled (A+02) to ON. This setting makes it possible to obtain all data even when multiple pieces of data are sent.

• When data write complete (B+03) is set to ON, new data is written into D+02 and over. Perform a data transfer at the timing for setting data write complete flag (B+03) to ON.

• Data after D+02 will be overwritten. As a result, if the length changes, since previous data may remain in the region, program to delete data from D+04, if necessary, after transferring data.

E SR-750 UM

Set up the R101 and set it to sequential processing.

Write "0" into DM1000 and set to use the alternate function.

Input R000 as read timing.

Use the data write request flag (R202), data write enabled flag (R102), data write complete flag (R203) to perform sequential processing.

Page 91

9-5 PLC Link Error

This section describes how to handle a communication error when it occurs during PLC link.

 Operation when a PLC link error occurs

When a PLC link error occurs, the SR-750 Series exhibits the following behavior:

• "E7" is displayed on the multiple LED indicator.

• When ERR BUSY is set to the output terminal, the set output terminal turns on.

Since the operation is stopped during this period, no timing input signal is accepted.

 Check points

When an error occurs, check the following points:

• Check that the cable between SR-750 Series and PLC is correctly connected.

• Check that the correct communication cable, including wiring, is used. Check for breaks.

• Is the SR-750 Series correctly set to the PLC link?

• Was the PLC to be connected turned on again after setting is complete?

• Is the PLC configuration correct?

• Is the address configuration for each control within the range of use of the PLC?

• Are the devices specified for each control address within the range of use of the SR-750 Series?

 Procedure for PLC link error recovery

Use the following procedure to clear the PLC link error of the SR-750 Series and resume communication.

• Turn the SR-750 Series back on.

• Hold the TEST button on the SR-750 Series for 3 seconds.

• When Clear PLC link error is set to the IN terminal, turn on the IN terminal.

• Send the Clear PLC link error command (PCLR) from the command communication port.

• Send the Reset command (RESET) from the command communication port.

When the PLC link error is cleared, data stored in the send buffer will be cleared.

If the problem persists despite the above action, contact your nearest KEYENCE sales office.

E SR-750 UM

Page 92

10-1

HUB

Master unitSlave unitSlave unit

Host

PLC

TEST TUNE

SR-625

POWERR

NETIN

STB

OK/NG/

TEST TUNE

SR-625

POWERR

NETIN

STB

OK/NG/

TEST TUNE

SR-625

POWERR

NET

STB

OK/NG/

Master unit sends data of Slave units to the host.

HUB

Slave unit

Master unit

Host

PLC

TEST TUNE

SR-625

POWERR

NETIN

STB

OK/NG/

TEST

TUNE

SR-625

POWERR

NET

STB

OK/NG/

SR-625

TEST

TUNE

POW

ERR

NET

STB

OK/NG/

Master unit controls Slave units.

Master unit/Slave unit settingsMaster unit settings

Master/Slave function

10-2

Setting procedure

The Master/Slave function has two types of modes: Multi drop link mode and Multi head mode. This section describes the overview of each mode.

Multi drop link mode

With this mode, one Master unit collects the read data of multiple units (up to 32 units) of SR-D100 and SR-750 Series operating with different purposes and sends the data to the host. Because the host only has to communicate with the SR designated as Master, the host does not need to consider the communication control for multiple units. Thus, the system load is reduced with the simple program. Also for PLC, only one communication unit is necessary to control multiple units. This enables the simple device configuration.

Multi head mode

Use this mode when you do not know the position of a code in one reading target workpiece or when the workpiece is larger than the field of view and the entire workpiece cannot fit within the field of view using one unit. Because multiple units (up to 8 units) of SR-D100 and SR-750 Series can be handled as one device, the host does not need to consider the control for multiple units, and the program becomes simple.

Make the setting according to the following procedure.

(1) Ethernet setting for each code reader

Change each reader's IP address avoiding duplication of IP address. Make the same setting for Subnet mask.

(2) Operation setting, group name and unit ID setting

Target mode :

Select either the Multi drop mode or the Multi head mode.

Group name : Set the same group name for all units. (Up to 1-byte

16 characters) If there is no problem with the default setting, no need to change.

Unit ID : Set Master ID and Slave IDs.

Set different IDs for all units.

(3) Append data setting

Set append data for each unit. If read data is only necessary, this setting is not required. Edit data function can also be set for each unit.

(4) Multi-code reading setting *Only in the Multi head mode

Set the number of codes to be read. (Number of read data: 1 to 8)

(5) Communication method selection

Decide which communication method the Master unit will use.

[Communication 2] setting

• Master unit Command port : Select a desired communication method. Data port 1 and 2 : Select a desired communication method.

• Slave unit Command port : Not used Data port 1 and 2 : Not used

(6) Header, terminator, etc. setting

Set the header, terminator, data length and checksum on the Master unit.

(7) Data transmission timing setting *Only in the Multi head mode

Set the data transmission timing.

Important

With the Master/Slave function, the following communication methods cannot be set.

•EtherNet/IP

• PROFINET

• Multi 1 read mode

• Multi 2 read mode

• Burst read mode (Only for the Multi head mode) For the following items, the Slave unit settings will not be reflected. They depend on the Master unit settings.

• Header • Terminator • Data length • Checksum Communication protocol: UDP Communicates via Directed Broadcast. When using the Master/Slave function, both Ethernet and RS-232C can be selected for data output from Master. However, connection between master and Slave must be made with Ethernet.

E SR-750 UM

Usable reading modes and protocols

 Usable reading modes

Reading mode Multi drop link Multi head

Single ○○

Multi 1 - -

Multi 2 - -

Burst ○ -

 Usable protocols with data port 1 and 2

Protocol Multi drop link Multi head

Non-procedure ○○

TCP ○○

MC protocol ○○

SYSWAY ○○

KV STUDIO ○○

EtherNet/IP - -

PROFINET - -

Advanced setting



When creating multiple Master/Slave groups within the same network

With the Master/Slave function, communication with other units in the same group is made. In this case, by making different group names, multiple Master/Slave groups can be made in the same network.

Page 93

10-3

Important

ERROR

Timing input

Master (ID0) operation

Data communication

Slave (ID1) operation

Communication between Master unit and Slave unit

• Reading success • Reading error

Reading OK

Important

Timing input

Master (ID0) operation

Data communication

Slave (ID1) operation

• Reading success • Reading erro r

Reading OK

With the Multi drop link mode, reading operations of each SR-D100 or SR-750 Series are controlled by each unit. However, transmission of timing commands and sending read data are collected and controlled by the Master unit.

Multi drop link mode

Control methods of Multi drop link mode

The Multi drop link mode has the following 3 control methods.

• Control for reading by inputting the timing signal to each SR-D100 and SR-750 Series

• Control for reading by sending commands to each SR-D100 and SR-750 Series via Master unit

• Control for reading by making the PLC link communication to each SR-D100 and SR-750 Series via Master unit (For memory map, etc., refer to Chapter 10 PLC Link.)

Only read data is sent to the Master unit. Other data including test mode, preset registration results, etc. are not output.

Number of read data: 2, Data transmission timing: Send after timing OFF

[ID0 data] [ID1 data]

If there are multiple read data and transmission is made after timing OFF, the data is output from the smaller ID number regardless of the order of reading.

ERROR

 Data format

Header

ID0 (Master)

read data

Inter-

delimiter

ID1 (Slave)

read data

Inter-

delimiter

…

Ter min ato r

Usable commands in the Multi drop link mode

 Timing ON command

Send command %Tmm–LON mm: Master/Slave ID (00 to 31)

Response %Tmm–OK,LON

%Tmm–LON,bb bb: Bank No. (01 to 16)

* For SR-750, bb: 01 to 10 are valid.

With mm≠00, if bb: 11 to 16 are assigned, no response is returned.

%Tmm–OK,LON,bb

 Timing OFF command

Send command %Tmm–LOFF mm: Master/Slave ID (00 to 31) Response %Tmm–OK,LOFF

 Command to obtain model code and main unit version

Send command %Tmm–KEYENCE mm: Master/Slave ID (00 to 31)

 CANCEL command (Cancels operations of the Master unit

and Slave Units.)

Send command %Tmm–CANCEL mm: Master/Slave ID (00 to 31)

* Master unit ID and Slave unit IDs are shown below.

• Master unit ID: 00

• Slave unit ID: 01 to 31

10-4

With the Multi head mode, while the Master unit and Slave units are synchronized, one reading operation is performed simultaneously and controlled. The timing input instruction is made to the Master unit.

Multi head mode

Read data format

In the Multi head mode, the data format differs depending on the data transmission timing.

Control methods of Multi head mode

The Multi head mode has the following 3 control methods.

• Control for reading by inputting the timing signal to Master SR-D100 or SR-750 Series

• Control for reading by sending the timing ON command to Master SR-D100 or SR-750 Series

• Control for reading by making the PLC link communication to Master SR-D100 or SR-750 Series (For memory map, etc., refer to Chapter 9 PLC Link.)

• Only read data is sent to the Master unit. Other data including test mode, preset registration results, etc. are not output.

• Data transmission timing setting is made on the Master unit. Set "Send after read" for all Slave units.

• Set the number of codes to be read to the total number of connected Master/Slave units or less. If the number of codes to be read is more than the total number of units, reading cannot be completed.

Usable commands in the Multi head mode

 Timing ON command

Send command LON Response OK,LON

 Timing OFF command

Send command LOFF Response OK,LOFF

 Command to obtain model code and main unit version

Send command %Tmm–KEYENCE mm: Master/Slave ID (00 to 31)

 CANCEL command (Cancels operations of the Master unit

and Slave Units.)

Send command CANCEL

Number of read data: 2, Data transmission timing: Send after reading

 Timing chart

Read data of each ID are sent to the upper level via the Master unit.

Important

Multi head mode: On the SR-750 set as the Master unit, you cannot configure the following settings under Saving Images.

•

OK image

•

Comparison NG

•

Unstable image

E SR-750 UM

Page 94

11-1

Communication cycle (RPI) setting SR-750 (1): 10 ms SR-750 (2): 50 ms SR-750 (3): 1000 ms

SR-750 (1)

RPI = 10 ms

SR-750 (2)

RPI = 50 ms

SR-750 (3)

RPI = 1000 ms

EtherNet/IP

PLC

The communication cycle (RPI) put together in order of priority can be set and network load can be ad justed.

Send

Receive

PLC

Receive

Process, operation

Send

SR-750

Command

Response

Data

Scanner adaptor

NOTICE

EtherNet/IP

This section describes an overview of EtherNet/IP.

EtherNet/IP

EtherNet/IP is an industrial communications network proposed by ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.). EtherNet/IP communication can share the network with normal Ethernet communication.

 Scanner and adaptor

In EtherNet/IP communication, one device opens a communication line called "connection" to another device. The device which opens the connection is called the "scanner" (originator), and the receiving device is called the "adaptor" (target). A PLC is primarily used as the scanner. The SR-750 becomes the adaptor device.

Cyclic communication and message communication

In EtherNet/IP, there is cyclic communication (Implicit message) that handles periodic sending and receiving of data, and there is also message communication (Explicit message) which handles sending and receiving of commands/responses arbitrarily.

 Cyclic communication

In cyclic communication, RPI (communication cycle) can be set according to the priority of data that is sent and received. Overall communication load adjusted data can be sent and received.

 SR-750 Series EtherNet/IP function overview

The following describes the functions that can control the SR-750 Series using EtherNet/IP.

Function Description

Reading instruction Performs reading instructions.

Preset instructions Records successfully read data as preset data.

Calibration instructions

Error-handling Checks the cause of the error that occurred in the main unit, and

Main unit status acquisition

Operation results acquisition

Terminal status acquisition

Main unit reset instructions

Also performs reading end, bank setting reading, etc.

Also registers or deletes preset data from the PLC.

Performs calibration. Can save calibration results in the set bank.

returns the error. (Example: Buffer overflow check/cancellation)

Checks the main unit status (BUSY status).

Acquires read data. When set to silent mode, the read data is not updated.

Acquires input terminal and output terminal status.

Displays the SR-750 Series software reset.

About the exclusion process

The SR-750 Series can simultaneously give control instructions to multiple interfaces (I/O terminal, RS-232C, Ethernet Communication (TCP/IP), EtherNet/IP communication, test key operation). However, when a control instruction is being received from one interface, instructions from other interfaces cannot be received.

List of applicable PLC models

Refer to each PLC instruction manual for the corresponding PLC setting procedures.

 Message communication

In message communication, timing is controlled through commands/responses.

SR-750 Series EtherNet/IP Communication Specifications and Function Overview



SR-750 Series EtherNet/IP Communication Specifications

Number of connections

Cyclic communication (Implicit message)

Message communication (Explicit Message)

Communication size

Number of connections

Applicable messaging methods

* There is a total of 16 connections in cyclic communication and message

communication.

KEYENCE KV Series 4 to 1444 bytes

Rockwell Automation ControlLogix CompactLogix

OMRON CJ/CS Series 4 to 1436 bytes

UCMM (unconnected type), Class 3 (connected type)

4 to 496 bytes

PLC manufactured by KEYENCE

KV Series

PLC model

KV-3000 KV-EP21V Ver. 2 or later KV STUDIO Ver. 6.0 or later

KV-5000 KV-EP21V Ver. 2 or later

KV-5500

EtherNet/IP

Communication unit

-(KV-5500 built-in port or KV-EP21V)

Firmware

version

Ver. 2 or la te r

Software used

Version of

software used

PLC manufactured by Rockwell Automation

ControlLogix category PLC

PLC model

1756 ControlLogix 1756-ENBT/1756-

1769 ConpactLogix

SLC5/05 category PLC

PLC model

1747 SLC5/05 -(SR-750 built-in

1761/1766 MicroLogix

1762/1763/1764 MicroLogix

EtherNet/IP

Communication unit

EN2T

-(SR-750 built-in port)

EtherNet/IP

Communication unit

port)

-(SR-750 built-in port)/1761-NETENI

1761-NET-ENI

Firmware

version

Ver. 13 or later RsLogix5000 Ver. 13 or later

Ver. 13 or later

Firmware

version

OD firmware level Series C, FRN 10 or later

Series A, Revision A, FRN1

Software used

RsLogix500 Ver. 7.10 or later

Version of

software used

Version of

software used

PLC manufactured by Omron

E SR-750 UM

PLC model

SYSMAC CJ2 -(CJ2 built-in port

SYSMAC CJ1 CJ1W-EIP21 Ver. 1.0 or later

SYSMAC CS1 CJ1W-EIP21 Ver. 1.0 or later

EtherNet/IP

Communication unit

or CJ1W-EIP21)

Firmware

version

Ver. 1.0 or later CX-One Ver. 3.0 or later

Software used

Version of

software used

Page 95

11-2

NOTICE

Reading result

Handshake information

Device status

Busy/error information

Statistical information

Reading instruction

Handshake instruction

Calibration

Reading result

Handshake information

Device status

Busy/error information

Statistical information

Reading instruction

Handshake instruction

Calibration

IN area

OUT area

IN area

Communication cycle (RPI)

Set with PLC

Input assembly (send)/ Output assembly (receive) size

Cyclic communication

This section describes the SR-750 Series cyclic communication setting procedures and functions.

SR-750 Series cyclic communication

When cyclic communication is performed in the SR-750 Series using EtherNet/IP, SR-750 series functions are assigned to the PLC devices. Use the function allocated to each device according to the intended usage.

2 Communication 2 tab

• Set the PLC communication interface and protocol. Interface : Ethernet Protocol : EtherNet/IP

3 PLC communication's EtherNet/IP settings

Click the EtherNet/IP setting button, open the EtherNet/IP setting screen, and perform the following settings.

• : Set "maximum result data size + 44 bytes" or

more.

• Data handshake : Put a check on this when performing a

handshake process.

• Data area byte swap : The storage order of data memory (Read

result data/Preset data) can be changed. Disable: Writes data in an ascending order. Enable: Writes data in a descending order.

• Communication settings such as cyclic communication's communication cycle and data size are performed in the PLC. When there is a large load in the network which connects many devices including EtherNet/IP devices, delays or packet loss may occur. Perform a thorough verification before operation.

• When performing EtherNet/IP communication with PLCs (SLC5/ 05 MicroLogix Series manufactured by Rockwell, etc.) that do not support cyclic communication, use message communication.

Cyclic communication setting procedures

This section describes the setting procedures when performing cyclic communication.

SR-750 Series settings

For the SR-750 Series, use the AutoID Network Navigator and perform the following settings.

1 Communication 1 tab

• IP address setting

• Subnet mask setting

• Default gateway setting

PLC settings

 About PLC settings

When performing cyclic communication, perform the following settings in the PLC. (1) Settings for the connection used (2) Device settings used in cyclic communication

(For setting procedures, refer to the manual of each PLC.) * When using the KV Series, making a selection within KV STUDIO will

automatically set (1) and (2).

 Connection used

Open a connection from the scanner using EtherNet/IP during cyclic communication. There are various types of connections. Usable connections vary depending on the device. Connections that the SR-750 Series can use are as follows:

Connection type Data type Instance ID Size (byte) RPI (ms)

Exclusive Owner

(Data transmission +

control)

Input Only

(Data transmission

only)

• Exclusive Owner

This connection can perform the following communications.

•PLC → SR-750 ............ Control instruction

•SR-750→ PLC ................. Data Send

Use this connection to send read data of SR-750, and also when PLC performs control instruction to SR-750 such as start of reading. Multiple "Exclusive Owner" connections cannot be used for a single unit of SR-

750.

Result data (Input Assemblies)

Control data (Output Assemblies)

Result data (Input Assemblies)

Control data (Output Assemblies)

0X64(100) 40 to 1400

0X65(101) 8 to 1400

0X64(100) 40 to 1400

0XFE(254) 0

E SR-750 UM

10 to 10000

Page 96

• Input Only

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(6)

(8)

(5)

(7)

(9)

This connection can perform the following communications.

• SR-750 → PLC.............. Data Send

This connection is used only when sending read data of SR-750. Multiple "Input only" connections can be used for a single unit of SR-750. (Max.

16) For multiple PLCs to receive data transmission from a single SR-750, set the PLCs as follows.

* Each connection's trigger timing is performed through cyclic. The SR-750

Series connection type supports both Point to Point and Multicast.

* When using the KV series, the connection names are assigned as follows.

1: Exclusive Owner ⇒result data / control data Class1 2: Input-Only ⇒result data Class1(Input-Only)

KV-5500 Series settings

3 Set the ETHERNET-MODULE as follows:

Information regarding connection for KV-5500 and SR-D100 has been prepared. Download the information from KEYENCE homepage.

Control/Compact Logix Series settings

The following is the procedure for registering the SR-750 Series in EtherNet/IP communication using Control Logix. Compact Logix can also be set using the same operation.

1 Right-click the EtherNet/IP enabled device on the RSLogix5000 and

select New Module.

2 Click the Communications' [+] button, select ETHERNET-MODULE

(Generic Ethernet Module), and click OK.

(1) Name : Optional setting

(2) Comm Format : Optional setting

(3) IP Address : SR-750 Series IP address setting

(4) Input (Assembly Instance) : 100 (fixed)… Input the instance ID of result

(5) Input (Size) : SR-750 Series Input assembly size setting

(6) Output (Assembly Instance) : 101 (fixed)…Input the instance ID of control

(7) Output (Size)

(8) Configuration : 1

(9) Configuration Size : 0

*1 This can be optionally set. However, considering the structure of the assembly

object, it is much easier to program if it set to a format in which 4-byte alignment is

possible. *2 When operating using Input Only, set (6) to 254 and (7) to 0. *3 The SR-750 Series does not use Configuration. However, input the above value

since not doing so will result in an incomplete input error. *4 Input assembly size for the SR-750 Series is set in 8 bits (1-byte unit), the size for

RSLogix5000 is set in 32 bits (4-byte unit).

When setting, make sure that the SR-750 Input assembly size and Output

assembly size are the same or more of the values for (5) and (7).

: SR-750 Series Output assembly size setting

*2*4

data (Input Assemblies) in decimal number.

data (Output Assemblies) in decimal number.

CJ Series settings

1 Set the PLC network communication.

Using the CX-Developper, make the communication settings of PLC's IP address, etc.

2 Set the EtherNet/IP network configuration for PLC and SR-750.

Using Network Conﬁgurator, set the network configuration. * The EDS file for SR-750 is in the EDS folder on disc1 of SR-H3W.

3 Register the transmission area tag and the reception area tag for

PLC.

Right-click the PLC icon on Network Conﬁgurator, select [Parameter] – [Edit], enter the [Edit device parameter] setting screen, and edit the tag.

4 Make the setting to relate the PLC tag with the SR-750 tag.

Register the device on the [Edit device parameter] setting screen and make the connection assignment setting. Transfer the configuration parameters to the PLC to complete the setting.

E SR-750 UM

[Setting example] Connection I/O type: Class1

Originator device (PLC) Target device (SR-750)

Input tag set E0_00000 - [500byte]

Connection type Multi-cast connection

Output tag set D00000 - [500byte]

Connection type Point to Point connection

* For operation details of CX-Developper and Network Conﬁgurator, see

"SYSMAC CS/CJ Series EtherNet/IP Unit User's Manual" published by Omron.

Output tag set

Input tag set

Input_100 - [500byte]

Output_101 - [500byte]

Page 97

Cyclic communication data assignment

Data assignment during cyclic communication is performed as follows.

Result data (Input Assemblies)

Parameter details of result data (Input Assemblies)

Input Assemblies (Address 0, Bit 0 to Bit 7) Handshake and error status

Input Assemblies is a device that write responses from the SR-750 Series to the PLC. When using this device, each device function is assigned as follows. Device status, Result Data, etc. are written to the Input Assemblies.

 Input Assemblies memory map (Instance ID: 0x64)

SR-750 → PLC

Address

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bi t 0

FILE

ERR

MODE

LOCK

4 Matching Level

5 ISO/IEC15415 Grade

6 AIM DPM Grade

8 Reading Error Cause

9 Preset Reading Failure Cause

10 Preset Data Registration Failure Cause

11 Tuning Failure Cause

15 External Instruction Operation Error Cause

16 General Error Cause

18 Read Data Ready Count

19 Read Data Update Count

21 Read Data Size

22 and above

External Instruction Operation Failure

Read Data

BUSY

SAE AS9132 Unstable

BUSY

Tuning Failure

AIM DPM Unstab le

BUSY

Preset Data Registration Failure

ISO/ IEC15415 Unstable

TRG BUSY

Preset Reading Failure

Matching Level Unstable

BUSY

Reading Error

Unstable

General Error

External Instruct ion Operation Complete

Buffer Overflow Error

OUT3 Status

OUT2 Status

Gray parts are reserved areas for the system.

OUT1 Status

Tuning Complete

Read Data Update Complete

Preset D ata Registration Complete

Read Data Update Available

Preset Reading Complete

IN2 Stat us

Error

Reading Complete

IN1 Stat us

C o n t r o l d a t a ( O u t p u t A s s e m b l i e s )

Output Assemblies is a device that write instructions from the PLC to the SR-750 Series. When using this device, each device function is assigned as follows. Output Assemblies performs device control instructions, error clear, handshake process, etc.

 Output Assemblies memory map (Instance ID: 0x65)

PLC → SR-750

Address

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bi t 0

2 Bank Number

5 Preset Data Size

6 and

Preset Data

above

Tuning Star t Request

Preset Data Registration Star t Request

Preset Reading Star t Request

Reading Star t Request

Error Clear Transmission Buffer C lear

External Instruct ion Operation Complete Clear

Gray parts are reserved areas for the system.

Tuning Complete Clear

Preset D ata Registration Complete Clear

Read Data Update Permitted

Preset Reading Complete Clear

Reading Complete Clear

Address

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Address

Bit Name Description Data contents

0 0 Error

Read Data

Update Available

Read Data

Update Complete

Buffer Overflow

Error

0 7 General Error

This Bit turns ON when either "6 Buffer Overflow Error" or "7 General Error" Bit is ON.

This Bit is used when using handshake. This displays whether read data exists or not.

This Bit is used when using handshake. This turns ON when read data update is complete.

This turns ON when buffer overflow error occurs.

This turns ON when errors other than buffer overflow error occur. If this turns ON, the error code is output to "Address 16 General Error Cause".

0: No error 1 : Error

0: No read data 1 : Read data available

0→1: Result data update

complete

0: No error 1 : Error

* Handshake is a communication procedure to make the permission system for

read data writing.

Input Assemblies (Address 0, Bit 8 to Bit 13) BUSY status

Address

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Address

Bit Name Description Data contents

0 8 BUSY

This Bit turns ON when any of the following BUSY Bits (9 to 13) is ON.

0 9 TRG BUSY TRG BUSY

0 10 LOCK BUSY LOCK BUSY

0 11 MODE BUSY MODE BUSY

0 12 ERR BUSY ERR BUSY

0:1 : BUSY status

0:1 : TRG BUSY status

0:1 : LOCK BUSY status

0:1: MODE BUSY status

0:1 : ERR BUSY status

Input Assemblies (Address 1, Bit 0 to Bit 7) Completion status

Address

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Address

Bit Name Description Data contents

Reading

Complete

Preset

Reading Complete

Preset Data

Registration Complete

Tuning

Complete

External Instruction

Operation Complete

*1 This Bit also turns ON when the character string of "ERROR" is output when

reading error occurs.

*2 This returns to 0 when turning the applicable clear Bit ON or at next operation.

This turns ON when reading is

complete.

This turns ON when preset reading is complete.

This turns ON when preset data registration is complete.

This turns ON when tuning is complete.

This turns ON when "Reading", "Preset reading" or "Tuning" is performed with the IN terminal or command and the operation is complete.

0:1 : Complete

Important

After "1 Preset Reading Complete", "2 Preset Data Registration Complete" or "3 Tuning Complete", wait 5 seconds or more and start reading operation. If reading operation starts before 5 seconds elapse, it does not operate normally.

E SR-750 UM

Page 98

Input Assemblies (Address 1, Bit 8 to Bit 15) Error status

Address

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Address

Bit Name Description Data contents

1 8 Reading Error

Preset

Reading Failure

Preset Data

110

Registration Failure

Tuning

111

Failure

External Instruction

115

Operation Failure

This turns ON when reading error or comparison NG occurs.

This turns ON when preset reading fails.

This turns ON when preset data registration fails.

This turns ON when tuning fails.

This turns ON when "Reading", "Preset reading" or "Tuning" is performed with the IN terminal or command and the operation fails.

0:1 : Reading error,

Comparison NG

0:1 : Preset reading failure

0:1 : Preset data

registration failure

0:1 : Tuning failure

0:1 : External instruction

operation failure

* If any of the above errors occurs, the error code is output to "Failure cause status

(Input Assemblies address 8 to 16)".

Input Assemblies (Address 2, Bit 0 to Bit 6) Terminal status

Input Assemblies (Address 4 to 6) Total evaluation grade for matching level and code quality verification function

Address

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Address

Bit Name Description

Matching Level

ISO/IEC15415 Grade

AIM DPM Grade

Matching Level * If multiple codes are read, the

minimum value is output.

Total evaluation grade for ISO/ IEC15415 verification

Total evaluation grade for ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-2006)

* Use this status when the code quality verification function of SR-750 is enabled.

For the code quality verification function settings, refer to "3-11 Code quality verification function".

Data

contents

0 to 100 UINT

4: A 3: B 2: C 1: D 0: F

Data type

UINT

Address

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Address

Bit Name Description Data contents

2 0 IN1 Status

2 1 IN2 Status

2 4 OUT1 Status

2 5 OUT2 Status

2 6 OUT3 Status

This represents IN1 terminal status.

This represents IN2 terminal status.

This represents OUT1 terminal status.

This represents OUT2 terminal status.

This represents OUT3 terminal status.

0: OFF 1: ON

* The above chart shows the contents when the input polarity setting of the SR-750

is Norm. open (normally open). For Norm. closed (normally closed), the data is reversed as 0: ON 1: OFF.

* For assigning functions to terminals, refer to "3-6 Multi-I/O Function".

Input Assemblies (Address 2, Bit 8 to Bit 12) Judgment result status for matching level and code quality verification function

Address

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Address

Bit Name Description Data contents

28Unstable

Matching Level

Unstable

ISO/IEC15415

210

Unstable

AIM DPM

211

Unstable

SAE AS9132

212

Unstable

This Bit turns ON when any of the following Unstable Bits (9 to 12) is ON.

Matching level judgment result

ISO/IEC15415 verification judgment result

ISO/IEC TR 29158 (AIM DPM-1-

2006) verification judgment result

SAE AS9132 Unstable verification judgment result

* Use this status when the code quality verification function of SR-750 is enabled.

For the code quality verification function settings, refer to "3-11 Code quality verification function".

0: Stable 1 : Unstable

Input Assemblies (Address 8 to 16) Failure cause status

Address

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Address

Bit Name Description

Reading Error

Cause

Preset Reading

Failure Cause

Preset Data

Registration Failure Cause

Tuning Failure Cause

External Instruction Operation Error Cause

General Error Cause

When any of the error statuses (Input Assemblies Address 1, Bit 8 to Bit 15) turns on, the error code is output to the applicable location.

Data

contents

Error code

Data type

UINT

For error codes, refer to List of error codes (Page 111).

Input Assemblies (Address 18 to 19) Read data status

Address

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Address

Bit Name Description

Read Data

Ready Count

Read Data

Update Count

When the count number reaches 65535 and the next data arrives, the count number returns to 0.

Read Data Ready Count 0 to 65535*UINT

Read Data Update Count 0 to 65535*UINT

Data

contents

Data type

E SR-750 UM

Input Assemblies (Address 21 or above) Read data

Address

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

…

Address

Bit Name Description

21 Read Data Size Read data length 0 and above*UINT

22 and

above

Read Data Read Data Read data*BYTE[]

Data

contents

* When the header, terminator and append data are set to the read data of SR-750, the header,

terminator, append data and inter-delimiter are also output. [CR] has been set to the

terminator as the default setting. Accordingly, [CR] is appended after the read data for output. * If the silent mode is set for SR-750, read data is not output. * [NUL]0x00 is appended to the end of result data.

Data type

Page 99

Parameter details of control data (Output Assemblies)

Point

Output Assemblies (Address 0, Bit 1 to Bit 7) Handshake/Clear bit

Address

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Address

Bit Name Description Data contents

This Bit is used when using handshake. This displays whether read data exists or not.

The following Bits of Input Assemblies are cleared.

• Buffer Overflow Error

• General Error

• Read Result Ready Count

• Result Data Update Count

• Read data stored in the transmission buffer of the SR750 Series

0→1: Writing read data is

permitted.

1→0: -

0 : No read data 1 : Read data available

Read Data Update Permitted

Error Clear Transmission Buffer Clear

Output Assemblies (Address 2) Bank number

Address

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Address

Bit Name Description

Input a bank number here and start reading. Then, reading is performed with the parameter

2Bank Number

bank specified. Input a bank number here and start tuning. Then, the tuning result is stored to the specified parameter bank.

Data

contents

Parameter bank number:

1 to 10

Data type

UINT

* If inputting a parameter bank number other than 1 to 10 to start reading, then the

alternate reading is performed.

* If inputting a parameter bank number other than 1 to 10 to start tuning, then an

error occurs.

Output Assemblies (Address 5 and above) Preset data

Output Assemblies (Address 0, Bit 8 to Bit 11) Reading start request/Each operation instruction

Address

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Address

Bit Name Description Data contents

010

011

Reading Start Request

Preset Reading Start Request

Preset Data Registration Start Request

Tuning Start Request

The SR-750 Series starts reading.

Preset reading starts.

Specified preset data is registered to Address 5, 6 and above.

Tuning starts.

0→1: Reading start

1→0: Reading stop 0→1: Preset reading start

1→0: Preset reading stop 0→1: Preset data

1→0: 0→1: Tuning start

1→0: Tuning stop

registration start

*1 When specifying a bank, specify "Address 2 Bank number" *2 Preset data can be deleted by setting "1" for Address 5, setting "0xFF" for

Address 6 and then registering the preset data.

*3 Before starting tuning, specify "Address 2 Bank number".

If the bank number is illegal, a tuning error occurs.

Exclusive control of reading Start/each operation instruction For reading Start/each operation instruction, priority is given to the operation performed first. An error will occur if another operation is performed during operation.

Output Assemblies (Address 1, Bit 0 to Bit 7) Completion bit clear

Address

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Address

Bit Name Description Data contents

Reading

Complete Clear

Preset Reading

Complete Clear

Preset Data

Registration Complete Clear

Tuning

Complete Clear

External Instruction

Operation Complete Clear

When Complete Bits are cleared, Error/Failure Bits of each operation are also cleared.

"Reading Complete" Bit of Input Assemblies is cleared.

"Preset Reading Complete" Bit of Input Assemblies is cleared.

"Preset Data Registration Complete" Bit of Input Assemblies

is cleared.

"Tuning Complete" Bit of Input Assemblies is cleared.

"External Instruction Operation Complete" Bit of Input Assemblies

is cleared.

0→1: Bit clear

Address

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

6 …

Address

Bit Name Description

Preset Data

6 and

above

Size

Preset Data

Preset data length 0 and above UINT

Preset data is specified. (Terminator is not necessary.)

Data

contents

Preset data BYTE[]

Data type

List of error codes

Error code

0 No error -

100 to 199 Command error

201 Reading error Reading failed.

202 Comparison error The read data did not match the preset data.

210 Tuning failure

213 Tuning failure Tuning was aborted.

120

102 Bank number error

220 Preset data error

230

Type of error Error description

Values with 100 added to the "Command communication response error code" (page 9-4) are applicable.

The code could not be found within the field of view while tuning.

Operation

instruction error

EIP data update

error

Another operation instruction was received during operation. In this case, the incoming instruction is not performed.

The parameter bank number specification is invalid. Example: A number other than 01 to 16 is specified in

tuning operation.

The preset data specification is invalid. Example: The specified preset data size is invalid when

preset data is registered.

Read data larger than the specified size in the cyclic communication was received.

Cyclic communication operation procedures

The SR-750 Series offers two trigger input measurement methods: "Level trigger" and "One-shot trigger". Refer to "4-2 Timing Mode (Page 26)"

This section describes the SR-750 Series cyclic communication operation procedures for each trigger input measurement method. The following timing chart and operation descriptions use Output Assemblies "Read Start Request" (Address 0 Bit 8) for read start instruction of the SR-750 Series. The procedure without handshake is used for description.

E SR-750 UM

Page 100

Level trigger operation procedure

m+1m

Output

→

Iutput

←

: PLC←SR-750

: PLC→SR-750

Attribute

Output

→

Iutput

←

Iutput

←

Output

→

Iutput

←

Iutput

←

Iutput

←

Iutput

←

Iutput

←

Iutput

←

Iutput

←

Signal name

Read Request

TRG BUSY

Barcode/2D code Read Complete

Read Complete

Read Complete Clear

Reading Error

Reading Error Cause

OUT1 Status (OK)

OUT2 Status (ERROR NG)

Read Data Ready Count

Read Data Update Count

Read Data and Data Size

When reading successful

0 201

Read data ERROR

When reading fails

m+1m

Attribute

Output

→

Iutput

←

Iutput

←

Output

→

Iutput

←

Iutput

←

Iutput

←

Iutput

←

Iutput

←

Iutput

←

Iutput

←

Signal name

Read Request

TRG BUSY

Barcode/2D code Read Complete

Read Complete

Read Complete Clear

Reading Error

Reading Error Cause

OUT1 Status (OK)

OUT2 Status (ERROR NG)

Read Data Ready Count

Read Data Update Count

Read Data and Data Size

When reading successful

One-shot trigger duration

201

Read data ERROR

When reading fails

One-shot trigger duration

One-shot trigger operation procedure

This section describes the example when the trigger input measurement method of the SR-750 Series is set to the level trigger.

 Timing chart

The attributes (signal directions) are described using the following directions.

*1 Operations of OUT1 status and OUT2 status are described using the default

settings of the SR-750 Series operation and multi I/O.

*2 The read data ready count value and read data update count value may differ

depending on the operation status and communication frequency. For example, when a code is read and then the next reading is complete before updating the PLC data is complete, the result data load count value will have one more count value.

 When reading is successful

1 When "Read Request" of PLC turns OFF (0)→ON (1), the SR-750

Series starts reading operation and turns "TRG BUSY" ON (1).

2 The SR-750 Series operates as follows when reading a code.

• It turns "TRG BUSY" OFF(0) and "Read Complete" ON (1), and then writes the reading error cause to "Reading Result".

• It writes the output data and number of characters of output data to "Read Data" and "Read Data Size".

* When reading is successful, the reading error cause is "0" (No error).

3 When "Read Complete" of the SR-750 Series is ON (1), turn "Read

Complete Clear" of PLC ON (1).

4 When "Read Complete Clear" of PLC turns ON (1), the SR-750 Series

turns "Read Complete" OFF (0). When "Read Complete" OFF (0) is confirmed, turn "Read Complete Clear" of PLC OFF (0).

 When reading fails

1 When "Read Request" of PLC turns OFF (0)→ON (1), the SR-750

Series starts reading operation and turns "TRG BUSY" ON (1).

2 When "Read Request" of PLC turns OFF (0) before the SR-750 Series

read the code, the SR-750 Series operates as follows.

• It turns "TRG BUSY" OFF (0) and "Read Complete" and "Reading Error" ON (1), and then writes the "Reading Error Cause".

• It writes the output data and number of characters of output data to "Read Data" and "Read Data Size".

* When reading error occurs, "201" is written to "Reading Error Cause".

3 When "Read Complete" of the SR-750 Series is ON (1), turn "Read

Complete Clear" of PLC ON (1).

4 When "Read Complete Clear" of PLC turns ON (1), the SR-750 Series

turns "Read Complete" and "Reading Error" OFF (0). When "Read Complete" OFF (0) is confirmed, turn "Read Complete Clear" of PLC OFF (0).

When [Read Request] is turned ON/OFF at high speed while the EtherNet/IP cyclic cycle (RPI) is slow, the change of rising/falling

NOTICE

of [Read Request] may not be transmitted to the SR-750 Series.

E SR-750 UM

This section describes the example when the trigger input measurement method of the SR-750 Series is set to the one-shot trigger.

 Timing chart

*1 Operations of OUT1 status and OUT2 status are described using the default

settings of the SR-750 Series operation and multi I/O.

*2 The read data ready count value and read data update count value may differ

 When reading is successful

1 When "Read Request" of PLC turns OFF (0)→ON (1), the SR-750

Series starts reading operation and turns "TRG BUSY" ON (1).

2 The SR-750 Series operates as follows when reading a code within

the specified one-shot time.

• It turns "TRG BUSY" OFF(0) and "Read Complete" ON (1), and then writes the read operation result code to "Read Result Code".

• It writes the output data and number of characters of output data to "Result Data" and "Result Data Size".

* When reading is successful, the reading error cause is "0" (No error).

3 When "Read Complete" of the SR-750 Series is ON (1), turn "Read

Complete Clear" of PLC ON (1).

4 When "Read Complete Clear" of PLC turns ON (1), the SR-750 Series

turns "Read Complete" OFF (0). When "Read Complete" OFF (0) is confirmed, turn "Read Complete Clear" of PLC OFF (0).

 When reading fails

1 When "Read Request" of PLC turns OFF (0)→ON (1), the SR-750

Series starts reading operation and turns "TRG BUSY" ON (1).

2 When the one-shot time elapses before the SR-750 Series read the

code, the SR-750 Series operates as follows.

• It turns "TRG BUSY" OFF (0) and "Read Complete" and "Reading Error" ON (1), and then writes the "Reading Error Cause".

• It writes the output data and number of characters of output data to "Read Data" and "Read Data Size".

* When reading error occurs, "201" is written to "Reading Error Cause".

3 When "Read Complete" of the SR-750 Series is ON (1), turn "Read

Complete Clear" of PLC ON (1).

4 When "Read Complete Clear" of PLC turns ON (1), the SR-750 Series

turns "Read Complete" and "Reading Error" OFF (0). When "Read Complete" OFF (0) is confirmed, turn "Read Complete Clear" of PLC OFF (0).

100

KEYENCE SR-750 User Manual

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual

Introduction

General Precautions

Safety Information for SR-750 Series

Safety precautions on Laser product

Precautions on Proper Use

1-2 Part Names and Functions

System configuration

Setup Flow

Power supply to the SR-750 Series

Wiring when supplying 24 V to the control cable

Connection when supplying power from a PoE device

3-1 Using the SR-750 Series

Basic steps

SR-750 Main Unit Buttons

Operation of I/O terminals

3-2 Quick Calibration

Quick Calibration

Quick Calibration Function Operation

3-3 Alternate Function

Alternate Function

Parameter banks

Alternate Function Operations

Test Mode Measurement Status

3-4 Test Mode

SR-750 Series Test Mode

Test Mode Details

Preset/Verification Function

3-6 Multi-I/O Function

Function and Operation of the Input Terminals (IN1 and IN2)

Function and Operation of the Output Terminals (OUT1, OUT2 and OUT3)

3-7 Image Saving Function

Image Saving Function

Image file name

Image save mode

3-8 Silent Mode

Silent mode

SR-600 Compatible Output Mode

SR-600 compatible output mode

Batch Setting Code

Quick Setup Code

Code quality verification function

Code quality verification function for the SR-750 Series

Code quality verification function settings

Verification items description

Duplicate reading prevention interval reset

Types of the duplicate reading prevention interval reset

Edit data function/Edit image file name function

The edit data function and edit image file name function can do the following.

Procedure for setting the edit data function and edit image file name function

Handing of the script file when settings are changed, etc.

When executing the script file - status confirmation command

4-1 Reading Operations

Steps of Read Operation

4-2 Timing Mode

Type of timing mode

4-3 Data Transmission Timing

Type of data transmission timing

4-4 Read Mode

Single read mode

Multi 1 Read Mode

Multi 2 Read Mode

Burst Reading Mode

PC Requirements

Install Method

Startup Procedure

Adding Reader with Register Button

Adding Reader with Temporary IP Address Settings

5-2 Screen Layout

Screen

5-4 Details of Settings View

[Camera] tab

Tuning tab

Symbology tab

[Code] tab

Communication1

[Communication2] tab